Casio | AT-3 | manual | Casio AT-3 AT-5 Manual

‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪MA1011-B Printed in China‬‬
‫‪AT3/AT5-AR-1B‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ”ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ“‪.‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪AT3/AT5-AR-1B‬‬
‫● ﺃﻱ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺍء ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎً ﺍﻭ ﻛﻠﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻨﻌﺎً ﺑﺎﺗﺎً‪ .‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻱ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻤﻨﻮﻋﺎً ﺗﺤﺖ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻊ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﻓﺎﻥ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺌﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺇﺗﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺃﻳﺎً ﻛﺎﻧﺖ )ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺗﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﻘﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﻄﺮﺍﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻤﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ( ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻗﺪ ﻗﺎﻣﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺼﺢ ﺑﺈﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻹﺗﻼﻓﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻴﺊ ﻋﻦ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻛﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻸﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ ‪AR-4 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪AR-26 ..................‬‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ‪AR-6 ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪AR-7 ...................................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ‪AR-7 ......................................................................‬‬
‫‪ ,‬ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ”‪AR-7 ........................ “Please Wait‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪AR-8 .............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪AR-8 ..........‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪AR-26 ................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻹﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ‪AR-28 ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪AR-29 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ‪AR-29 ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪AR-30 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‪AR-9 ....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ ‪AR-31 ..............‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪AR-9 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ‪AR-9 ................................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪AR-31 .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺎ‪AR-33 ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪AR-35 ................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪AR-11 .....................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ‪AR-38 ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ‪AR-11.................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪AR-11.............................................................‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ‪AR-11.......‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪AR-12 ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ ‪AR-12 ........................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ‪AR-38 ................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ‪AR-39 ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪AR-41 ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ‪AR-13 ......................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪AR-13 .............‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ‪AR-14 .......................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪AR-14 ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪AR-15 ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ( ‪AR-18 ............‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪AR-18 .......................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪AR-19 ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ‪AR-20 .....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‪AR-20 ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً‬
‫)ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ( ‪AR-21 ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺷﺮﻗﻲ‪AR-22 ..............‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻌﻴﺔ ‪AR-22 ...............................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‪AR-23 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪AR-23 .....................................‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫)ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‪AR-25 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ( ‪AR-25 ......................‬‬
‫‪AR-2‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪AR-44 ........................‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪AR-44 ..........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪AR-45 ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪AR-47 ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪AR-49 .................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ‪AR-49 ...................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪AR-53 ...........................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪AR-57 .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪AR-61 ........................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪AR-62 ............................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪AR-62 ............................‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ‪AR-63 .....................‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ )‪AR-63 ........................ (EASY REC‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪AR-65 ............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ‪AR-67 ..............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ( ‪AR-71 ....................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪AR-73 ..........‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ‪AR-74 .....................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ‪AR-76 ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪AR-80 ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‪AR-82 ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ )ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ( ‪AR-95 .....................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪AR-97 ........................‬‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪AR-97 ......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪AR-98 ...................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺈﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺳﻬﻞ( ‪AR-107 .........................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ )ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ( ‪AR-108 ...............................‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ )ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء( ‪AR-111 .........‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪AR-113......................................................‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ‪AR-115.....................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪AR-116 ...................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ‪AR-116............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺃﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪AR-116..........................‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ‪AR-117...............................................‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪AR-121 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪AR-125 .....................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪AR-125 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪AR-126 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪AR-131 ......................‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪AR-132 .........................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ‪AR-132 ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪AR-132 ..................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪AR-133 ...........‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪AR-135 ....................................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪AR-136 ...............................‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪AR-136 ......................‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪AR-137 ..............................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪AR-140 .........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ‪AR-140 ................................‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ‪AR-141 ...............‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﻳﺔ( ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ‪AR-141 ........‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ‪AR-142 ...........................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‪AR-143 .......................................‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ‪AR-143 ..........................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ ‪AR-145 ...........................................................‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ‪AR-147 ............................................................‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪AR-149 .....................................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪AR-150 ..................................................DSP‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪AR-155 .................................................‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪AR-155 ..............................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪AR-156 .......................................................‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ MIDI‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء‪AR-157 ...........................................‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪AR-158 ..........................................................‬‬
‫‪MIDI Implementation Chart‬‬
‫‪AR-3‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪.AT-5‬‬
‫‪C-1 – C-17‬‬
‫‪L-1 – L-18‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫‪S-2‬‬
‫‪S-1‬‬
‫‪R-1 – R-20‬‬
‫‪D-1 – D-17‬‬
‫‪T-1 – T-9‬‬
‫ﺧﻠﻒ‬
‫‪AR-4‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
.AT-3/AT-5 ‫ ﺍﻟﻠﻔﻆ ”ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ“ ﺗﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ‬،‫• ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ‬
.‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻴﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ‬
.‫ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬$ ‫ ﻭ‬# ‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻣﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻮﺯ‬
# EDIT ،SONG SEQUENCER ‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬.‫ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ‬R-13 (FUNCTION) ‫ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬: #
.R-13 (FUNCTION) ‫ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬EDIT ‫ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬BEAT ‫ ﺗﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬BEAT$ ،METRONOME ،‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬.‫ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬:
.‫ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
TONE ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
89 ،58 ،14 ............................................... 5 ،PIANO [A] ‫ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬R-1
89 ،58 ،14 ............................................1 ،E.PIANO [B] ‫ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬R-2
90 ،89 ،58 ،14 ....................................... 2 ،ORGAN [C] ‫ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬R-3
89 ،58 ،14 ...................................• ،GUITAR/BASS [D] ‫ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬R-4
95 ،14 ......................................... REST ،STRINGS [E] ‫ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬R-5
14 ........................................... BRASS/REED/PIPE [F] ‫ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬R-6
90 ،89 ،58 ،14 ......................................6 ،ARABIC [G] ‫ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬R-7
90 ،89 ،58 ،14 ...................................7 ORIENTAL [H] ‫ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬R-8
90 ،89 ،14 ............................................... 8 ،SYNTH [I] ‫ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬R-9
90 ،89 ،14 ..................................... , ،OTHERS [J] ‫ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬R-10
95 ،14 ................................... . ،GM/DRUMS [K] ‫ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬R-11
45 .....................................................USER TONES [L] ‫ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬R-12
125
........................................................... FUNCTION ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
،YES/t/+ ،NO/y/– ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
26 ،18 ،14 ،6 .............................................. #TRANSPOSE
EXIT ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
ENTER ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
7 ..............................................................i ،y ،t ،u ‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
،AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
30 ،21 ........................................................................$TYPE
16 ............................................................................. SPLIT ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
18 ،16 ...............................................$OCTAVE ،LAYER ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
................................................................................1 ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
................................................................................2 ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
................................................................................3 ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
................................................................................4 ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
..................................................................... STORE ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
.......................................................................KEY C ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
......................................................................KEY C# ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
.......................................................................KEY D ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
...................................................................... KEY E ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
....................................................................... KEY E ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
....................................................................... KEY F ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
...................................................................... KEY F# ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
.......................................................................KEY G ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
...................................................................... KEY A ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
.......................................................................KEY A ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
...................................................................... KEY B ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
.......................................................................KEY B ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
AR-5
L-1
L-2
L-3
RHYTHM ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
R-13
R-14
R-15
R-16
R-17
R-18
R-19
R-20
D-1
D-2
D-3
D-4
D-5
D-6
D-7
D-8
D-9
D-10
D-11
D-12
D-13
D-14
D-15
D-16
D-17
20 .................................................................PITCH BEND ‫ﻋﺠﻠﺔ‬
20 ............................................................... MODULATION ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
131 .................................................................SD CARD SLOT
140 .............................................................................USB ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬
11 ...........................................SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK
11 ....................................................................... PHONES ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬
12 ..........................................................................INST IN ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬
12 ...................................................................... AUDIO IN ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬
9 ............................................................................DC 12V ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬
12 ........................................................................... MIC IN ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬
11 .................................................L/MONO ،LINE OUT R ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺑﺲ‬
.................................................................... POWER ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
............................... MAIN VOLUME ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‬
............................... MIC VOLUME ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
26 ،14 ................................. POPS/ROCK/DANCE [A] ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
26 ............................................. JAZZ/EUROPEAN [B] ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
26 ...................................................LATIN/WORLD [C] ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
،ARABIC/ORIENTAL [D] ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
49 ،26 ......................................................MUSIC PRESET
،PIANO RHYTHMS [E] ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
49 ،29 ،26 ......................................ONE TOUCH PRESET
29 ،26 ........................................ USER RHYTHMS [F] ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
ORIENTAL SCALE ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻲ‬
25
25
25
25
25
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
13
13
12
$
19
19
19
L-4
L-5
L-6
L-7
L-8
L-9
...............................................$BEAT ،METRONOME ‫ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬L-10
.....................................................................TEMPO w ‫ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬L-11
....................................................#TAP ،TEMPO q ‫ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬L-12
RHYTHM/SONG CONTROLLER ‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬/‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
139 ،75 ،29 ....................................... REPEAT ،INTRO ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
137 ،74 ،29 ،14 ............... sREW ،NORMAL/FILL-IN ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
137 ،74 ،29 ،14 ................dFF ،VARIATION/FILL-IN ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
137 ،74 ،29 ،26 ............. PAUSE ،SYNCHRO/ENDING ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
،PLAY/STOP ،START/STOP ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
137 ،74 ،26 ،14 ........................................................ DEMO
،$CHORDS ،ACCOMP ON/OFF ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
138 ،28 ،26 ،14 ............................. DEMO ،PART SELECT
L-13
L-14
L-15
L-16
L-17
L-18
6 ......................................................................................‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
121 ................................................................AUDIO PLAY ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
118 ......................................................... AUDIO RECORD ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
97 ............................. #EDIT ،PATTERN SEQUENCER ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
76 ،67 ،7 ........................ #EDIT ،SONG SEQUENCER ‫ﺍﻟﺮﺯ‬
68 ،67 ،63 ........................................................... RECORD ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
39 ،33 ............................................. #EFFECT ،MIXER ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
45 ،23 .................................. #SCALE ،TONE EDITOR ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
135 ،133 ،132 ،7 ........................#LOAD/SAVE ،CARD ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
26 ،14 ،6 .......................................................................... ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
C-1
C-2
C-3
C-4
C-5
C-6
C-7
C-8
C-9
REGISTRATION ‫ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
S-1
S-2
T-1
T-2
T-3
T-4
T-5
T-6
T-7
T-8
T-9
94 ،87 ،61 ،58 .................................... DELETE ،BANK ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
95 ،89 ،61 ،58 ............................................. INSERT ،1 ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
89 ،61 ............................................................ COPY ،2 ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
90 ،61 .................................................... QUANTIZE ،3 ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
95 ،61 ،59 ....................................................... STEP ،4 ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
61 ................................................................................5 ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
61 ................................................................................6 ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
62 ،7 ............................................ #MENU ،STORE ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
C-10
C-11
C-12
C-13
C-14
C-15
C-16
C-17
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺗﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪4 5‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺆﻛﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﺰء‪ ١٦ ،‬ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ A‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ .B‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ L‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ A‬ﻳﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ M‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪.B‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-38‬‬
‫‪‬ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-7‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ‪ :‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﺼﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ،:‬ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ )‪ .(K‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻮﺿﻊ ‪ K‬ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍً ﻟﻠﻨﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )‪ (K‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.REVERB‬‬
‫‪‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-61‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-26‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-49‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺑﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ )‪ ،G ،C‬ﺍﻟﺦ( ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ )‪ ،m‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫‪‬ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-19‬ﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻢ ‪ MEASURE‬ﻭ ‪ BEAT‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺪﻫﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ )‪ .(0‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫)‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ “RHYTHM” ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً ﻷﻧﻪ ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ “Touch” ،‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً ﻷﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ”‪ ،“Touch‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪C-9 (CARD‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﻐﻄﻚ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ .C-17 (MENU‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ”‪ “Performance‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-5‬‬
‫)‪(SONG SEQUENCER‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪(:‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻫﻮ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺩﺧﻮﻟﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ )ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ;(‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-131‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-15‬‬
‫)‪ (EXIT‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ )ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ <(‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍءﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫”ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-63‬‬
‫– ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-5‬‬
‫)‪ (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻭ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻀﺎً‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ .R-15 (EXIT‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﺣﻴﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻸﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻗﺴﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ,‬ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ”‪“Please Wait‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﻔﻖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-1 (POWER‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-145‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺩﺧﻮﻝ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺬﻛﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-7‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﻋﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﺑﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﻠﻴﻘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺣﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ*‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺰﺍﻧﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺪﺭﺗﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫”‪) AutoResume‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-129‬ﻭ ”‪) Default‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-129‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-61‬‬
‫– ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-63‬‬
‫– ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-98‬‬
‫– ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-53‬‬
‫– ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-44‬‬
‫– ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-23‬‬
‫– ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-35‬‬
‫– ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪) LCD‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-128‬‬
‫– ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-129‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-130‬‬
‫‪AR-8‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ JEITA) AC‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺫﻭ ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﻣﻮﺣﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ‪AD-A12150LW :‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ )‪T-7 (DC 12V‬‬
‫ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺫﻋﺎﻥ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ”ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ“‪ .‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﺤﻮ ًﻻ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻘﺒﺲ ﺃﻭ ﻧﺰﻉ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ ،AC‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻭ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﻘﻄﺮﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺩﺍﻓﺌﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﻨﻊ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻚ‪ ،‬ﺧﺬ ﺣﺬﺭﻙ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻠﺜﻨﻲ!‬
‫ﻻ ﻟﻸﻟﺘﻔﺎﻑ!‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻌﺪﻥ‪ ،‬ﺃﻗﻼﻡ ﺭﺻﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪DC‬‬
‫‪ 12V‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺣﺎﺩﺛﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ”ﺃﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻰ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻛﺄﺩﺍﻩ ﻟﻠﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻰ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻘﻰ ﺟﺎﻫﺰ ﻹﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ“‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪AR-9‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫■ ﺗﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﺖ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ D-‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﻧﻚ‪-‬ﻛﺮﺑﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﻭﻛﺴﻴﺮﺍﻳﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻴﻜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﻉ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ D-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ* ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫* ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻂ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻟﺘﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﻣﺘﻰ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ‪ +‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ‪ -‬ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺒﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺇﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﻭﻣﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺃﻟﺴﻨﺔ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻟﺴﻨﺔ‬
‫‪AR-10‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﺭﻳﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﺯﻋﺎﺝ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻮﻱ ﻭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ )‪T-4 (PHONES‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯﺍً ﻣﺎ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ًﻻ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪L-2‬‬
‫)‪ (MAIN VOLUME‬ﻟﻜﺲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻳﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻻﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ‪ ،AUX IN‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪) RIGHT‬ﺃﺣﻤﺮ(‬
‫‪) LEFT‬ﺃﺑﻴﺾ(‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺗﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﺴﻤﻊ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺃﺱ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺮﻛﻚ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﻣﻘﺒﻮﺱ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺪﺍﻝ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻌﺰﻓﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”‪) Ped.Assign‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-126‬‬
‫)‪T-3 (SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻣﺴﻤﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪INPUT 1‬‬
‫‪INPUT 2‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻼﺕ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ )‪ T-9 (LINE OUT‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎً ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ .‬ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ LINE OUT R‬ﻫﻮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ‬
‫‪ LINE OUT L/MONO‬ﻫﻮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻟﺸﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻛﺒﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻨﺘﻘﻰ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻃﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ (AUX IN‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ )‪ L-2 (MAIN VOLUME‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻜﺒﺮ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺒﺴﻲ ‪T-9‬‬
‫)‪ (LINE OUT‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﻜﻞ ‪ .‬ﺧﺮﺝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ LINE OUT R‬ﻫﻮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪LINE OUT‬‬
‫‪ L/MONO‬ﻫﻮ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪LINE OUT L/MONO‬‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻫﻮ ﺧﻠﻴﻂ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺗﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺴﺐ ﺭﻏﺒﺘﻚ ﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻛﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ‬
‫)‪ L-2 (MAIN VOLUME‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-11‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪ ،CD‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ًﻻ ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪L-2‬‬
‫)‪ (MAIN VOLUME‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﻤﻘﺒﺲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ .T-5 (INST IN‬ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫)ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪﻯ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪L-2‬‬
‫)‪ (MAIN VOLUME‬ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪CD‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪(DSP ،‬‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ )‪ .T-6 (AUDIO IN‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﻤﻜﺒﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪L-2‬‬
‫)‪.(MAIN VOLUME‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ (DSP ،‬ﺗﻄﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ )‪ T-5 (INST IN‬ﻭ )‪ .T-8 (MIC IN‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-31‬ﻭ‬
‫”ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-38‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻻﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﺑﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﻠﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪T-6‬‬
‫)‪ (AUDIO IN‬ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ‬
‫ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﺪﻯ ﻃﺮﻓﻴﻪ ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪L-2‬‬
‫)‪ (MAIN VOLUME‬ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪CD‬‬
‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺩﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ )ﻓﻘﻂ( ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ )‪T-8 (MIC IN‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ ‪L-3‬‬
‫)‪ .(MIC VOLUME‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻠﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﻀﻴﻦ )‪ L-2 (MAIN VOLUME‬ﻭ‬
‫)‪ .L-3 (MIC VOLUME‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺎﻉ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﺘﺎﻟﻮﺝ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺎﺟﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﺋﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻷﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://world.casio.com/‬‬
‫‪AR-12‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪L-4‬‬
‫‪R-1 - R-12‬‬
‫‪L-1‬‬
‫‪L-2‬‬
‫‪R-14‬‬
‫‪R-19‬‬
‫‪R-20‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ )‪ L-2 (MAIN VOLUME‬ﺗﺠﺎﻩ ‪ MIN‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-11‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺒﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-1 (POWER‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺑﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ )ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪L-17‬‬
‫‪L-14‬‬
‫‪L-18‬‬
‫‪L-15‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺼﻤﻤﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪ .‬ﻭﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺳﺖ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪.AC‬‬
‫• ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ”‪ “on‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً ﻝ‬
‫”‪) “AutoPower‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-129‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻲ ﻫﻮ ”‪ .“on‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “oFF‬ﻝ‬
‫”‪) “AutoPower‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬
‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻭ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫”‪) AutoResume‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-129‬ﻭ ”‪Default‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-129‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﻔﻖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-1 (POWER‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-145‬‬
‫‪AR-13‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬
‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-4‬‬
‫)‪ ،([A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬
‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ .TONE ١٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ @ ﻭ ‪ A‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪R-19 (SPLIT‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-20 (LAYER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ R-1 ([A] PIANO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪R-12‬‬
‫)‪ ([L] USER TONES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻟﺤﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-18‬‬
‫)‪ ،(ACCOMP ON/OFF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-12 ([L] USER TONES‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-44‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻟﺤﺎﻥ ﺃﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻟﺤﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-15 (dFF‬ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-14 (sREW‬ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-14 (sREW‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-14 (sREW‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-15 (dFF‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﺤﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-17‬‬
‫)‪.(PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫‪AR-14‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ]‪ ،[C‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪004‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪ 001‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ( ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻻﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ )ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﻓﻲ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻌﻠﻮﻱ ‪ UPPER 1‬ﺑﻤﻔﺮﺩﻩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ UPPER 1‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪ .UPPER 2‬ﻋﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ‪.LOWER‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء‪:‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺗﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-18‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-38‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺛﻴﺮ‬
‫)ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-14‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ UPPER 1‬ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪UPPER 1‬‬
‫• ﻃﺒﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-16‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ UPPER 1‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪) UPPER 2‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫‪UPPER 1‬‬
‫‪UPPER 2‬‬
‫• ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-17‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ ،UPPER 1‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪) LOWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ :‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪UPPER 1‬‬
‫‪LOWER‬‬
‫• ﺛﻼﺙ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-17‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ ،UPPER 1‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ UPPER 2‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪) LOWER‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪ :‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ(‪.‬‬
‫‪UPPER 1‬‬
‫‪UPPER 2‬‬
‫‪LOWER‬‬
‫‪AR-15‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪R-14‬‬
‫‪R-19‬‬
‫‪R-20‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻭ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ )ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ UPPER 1‬ﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪ (UPPER 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻭ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ )ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ UPPER 1‬ﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪ (LOWER‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ @ ﻭ ‪ A‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﺍﺕ @ ﻭ ‪ A‬ﻟﻴﺴﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-19 (SPLIT‬ﻭ ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-20 (LAYER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻳﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪.UPPER 1‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ TONE‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪.UPPER 1‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-20 (LAYER‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-19 (SPLIT‬ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪ R-20 (LAYER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﺴﺢ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻳﻦ ﻻﻳﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪.UPPER 1‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ TONE‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪.UPPER 1‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-19 (SPLIT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ @ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪.LOWER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺧﺘﺮﺗﻬﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪.UPPER 2‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ TONE‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪.UPPER 2‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ TONE‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪.LOWER‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺃﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻘﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﻀﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-20 (LAYER‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ A‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺰﻱء‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-17‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫‪AR-16‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﺗﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-19 (SPLIT‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ @ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺗﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-19 (SPLIT‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺪﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ )ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪.(UPPER 1‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﻣﻌﺎً‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ‬
‫ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-16‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ‪.LOWER‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-19 (SPLIT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ UPPER 1‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪LOWER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ @ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪.LOWER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻀﻐﻄﻪ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ TONE‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪.LOWER‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪ UPPER 1‬ﻭ ‪ UPPER 2‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻃﺒﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ‪.LOWER‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻛﺄﺳﻢ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻘﺪ ﺃﻧﺘﻬﻴﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-19 (SPLIT‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﺗﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-19 (SPLIT‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ @ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-20 (LAYER‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ A‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪.F#3‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-26‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-17‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺭﻓﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻛﻠﻴﺎً‬
‫ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺮﺏ‪ ،‬ﺁﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪.R-14 (–‚ +‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻷﺟﺰﺍء ‪ ،UPPER 1‬ﻭ ‪ .LOWER ،UPPER 2‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﺮﻓﻊ ﻭﺧﻔﺾ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻳﻤﻦ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻧﻮﺗﺘﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺟﻮﺑﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-20 (OCTAVE‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪.UPPER 1‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪،R-13 (FUNCTION‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﻦ ‪ –12‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+12‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﻦ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+2‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ‪ ،UPPER 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-20 (OCTAVE‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ”‪ “UPPER 2‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪ .UPPER 2‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-13 (FUNCTION‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 00‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪ B‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫)‪ UPPER 2 ،UPPER 1‬ﻭ ‪ ،LOWER‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ (.‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ MIDI‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ‪ ،LOWER‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪.R-20 (OCTAVE‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-20 (OCTAVE‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ”‪ “LOWER‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪ .LOWER‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-18‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-10 (METRONOME‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺘﻴﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ :‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪ TEMPO‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﺮ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪TEMPO‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺬ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﻀﻌﺔ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ L-11 (TEMPO w‬ﻭ )‪L-12 (TEMPO q‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-10 (METRONOME‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-10 (BEAT‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪) L-11 (TEMPO w‬ﺃﺑﻄﺄ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-12‬‬
‫)‪) (TEMPO q‬ﺃﺳﺮﻉ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﻦ ‪ 30‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.255‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ ،0‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﻦ ‪ 2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .6‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ 0‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﺱ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-10 (BEAT‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫‪AR-19‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﻨﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺃﻧﻘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-12 (TAP‬ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ( ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺒﻄﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ‪ (S-1) PITCH BEND‬ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻻﻣﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺨﻠﻒ‪ .‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺍً ﻋﻨﻚ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺪﻭﺭﻳﻬﺎ ﺗﺠﺎﻫﻚ ﻳﺨﻔﻀﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻭﻝ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ )‪ L-12 (TAP‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﻻﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-12 (TAP‬ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫‪) “TEMPO‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-19‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ )ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻧﺤﻨﺎء( ﻛﻠﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”‪) BendRange‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻷﻧﺤﻨﺎء(“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-126‬ﻭ ”ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-43‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ‪ (LOWER ،UPPER 2 ،UPPER 1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻴﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ S-2 (MODULATION‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ )ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ DSP‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪S-2‬‬
‫•‬
‫)‪ ،(MODULATION‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪) “DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-37‬ﻭ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-47‬‬
‫– ‪) Mod Button Assign‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫– ‪) Mod Button On Value‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫– ‪) Mod Button Off Value‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪AR-20‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً )ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ(‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍً ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫‪.ARPEGGIATOR‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-18‬‬
‫)‪.(AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-18‬‬
‫)‪ (AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-125‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 013‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(162‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪R-18 (AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍً ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫‪.ARPEGGIATOR‬‬
‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻫﻨﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ArpegHold‬ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-126‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪) ArpegSpeed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-127‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪ UPPER‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ‪LOWER‬‬
‫ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ArpegPart‬ﺟﺰء ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ(‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-127‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-18‬‬
‫)‪ (AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ‪ARPEGGIATOR‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ‪ 001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،012‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-30‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-21‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺷﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫‪R-15‬‬
‫‪R-13‬‬
‫‪R-14‬‬
‫‪R-16‬‬
‫‪C-8‬‬
‫‪R-17‬‬
‫• ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ C‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪*.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻼﻟﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺷﺮﻗﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻌﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻔﺾ ﻟﺤﻈﻴﺎً ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﺑﻌﻴﺔ )‪ ٥٠‬ﺳﻨﺖ( ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ D-6 (KEY C‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ D-17 (KEY B‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺧﻔﻀﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻪ*‪ ١‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻀﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺭﺑﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﺨﻔﻴﺾ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ‪ E-‬ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺭﺑﻌﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء*‬
‫‪AR-22‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﻔﻴﻀﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ )ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٢‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲء )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺷﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﻟﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ( ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ‪ ١٢‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﻢ )ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ(‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ‪) 01‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ( ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-23‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ١‬ﺳﻨﺖ )‪ ١٠٠/١‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ D-6 (KEY C‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ D-17 (KEY B‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ‪E-‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲء )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (t‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ”‪ ،“Note‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (–, +‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‪.‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “Note‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺎً‬
‫ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎّ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ“ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-23‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻮﺭﺛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-8 (SCALE‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻋﻨﺪ ”‪.“Preset‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﻦ ‪ –99‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ +99‬ﺳﻨﺖ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪) ١‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-23‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺷﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ Equal :01‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪C‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-17 (i‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭﻳﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ C‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.(B‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪Equal‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪Pure Major‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪Pure Minor‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪Pythagorean‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻴﺜﺎﻏﻮﺭﺛﻲ‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪Kirnberger 3‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﻧﺒﺮﺟﺮ ‪III‬‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪Werckmeister‬‬
‫ﻓﻴﺮﻛﻤﻴﺴﺘﺮ ‪(III) 3-1‬‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪Mean-Tone‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫‪Rast‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺖ‬
‫‪09‬‬
‫‪Bayati‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﺗﻲ‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪Hijaz‬‬
‫ﺣﺠﺎﺯﻱ‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪Saba‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺑﺎ‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪Dashti‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻲ‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪Chahargah‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺮﺍﺟﺎ‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪Segah‬‬
‫ﺳﻴﺠﺎ‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪Gurjari Todi‬‬
‫ﺟﻮﺭﺟﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪Chandrakauns‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺎﻧﺪﺭﺍﻛﻮﻧﺲ‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪Charukeshi‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﺮﻭﻛﻴﺸﻲ‬
‫‪AR-24‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ”‪ “Fine Tune‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺷﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫)ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻭﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،D-5 (STORE‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪) SCALE MEMORY‬ﻣﻦ ‪ D-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (D-4‬ﻟﻠﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ )ﻳﺤﺬﻑ( ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.D-2 (2‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-8 (SCALE‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪.“AcmpScale‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪SCALE‬‬
‫‪) MEMORY‬ﻣﻦ ‪ D-1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (D-4‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪oFF‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪on‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-15‬‬
‫)‪.(EXIT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ Chord 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (Chord 5‬ﻭ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ )ﻣﻦ ‪ A11‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(A16‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪) Scale” (AR-43‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء(“‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-25‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪R-15‬‬
‫‪C-7‬‬
‫‪R-14‬‬
‫‪C-4‬‬
‫‪L-4 - L-9‬‬
‫‪L-11‬‬
‫‪L-12‬‬
‫‪R-17‬‬
‫‪L-13‬‬
‫‪L-14 L-16 L-18‬‬
‫‪L-15 L-17‬‬
‫‪R-18‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ (.‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻇﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻌﻚ ﺇﻳﻨﻤﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺬﻫﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ‪ ٢٥٠‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻘﺴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )ﺗﺪﻋﻰ ”ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“(‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ ،B‬ﺭﻗﻢ ‪005‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ L-4 ([A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)‪ L-9 ([F] USER RHYTHMS‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ 001‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-9 ([F] USER RHYTHMS‬ﻫﻮ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-97‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ L-11 (TEMPO w‬ﻭ )‪L-12 (TEMPO q‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-18 (ACCOMP ON/OFF‬ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪ D‬ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪ (D‬ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻻﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻕ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺁﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ )ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ ،(D‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺁﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ (.‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ )ﻻﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-26‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-16 (SYNCHRO/ENDING‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﻈﺮﻙ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ F‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ F‬ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪:‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫”‪) AccompVol.‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-128‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-17‬ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﺗﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫)‪L-13 (INTRO‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫‪L-15‬‬
‫)‪H (VARIATION/FILL-IN‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ‪E‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-29‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺟﺰء ﺁﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪C‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫• ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﻴﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”‪ “CASIO Chord‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺒﺴﻂ‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ“ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ L-14 (NORMAL/FILL-IN‬ﻭ ‪L-15‬‬
‫)‪ (VARIATION/FILL-IN‬ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-29‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ً L-16 (SYNCHRO/ENDING‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻗﺒﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-29‬‬
‫‪AR-27‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫■ ‪CASIO Chord‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻹﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺴﺎﺭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-17‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪.AT-5‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻹﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮﺍﻟﺨﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Fingered 1 :١‬‬
‫‪Fingered 2 :٢‬‬
‫‪Fingered 3 :٣‬‬
‫‪CASIO Chord :٤‬‬
‫‪Full Range :٥‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-18 (ACCOMP ON/OFF‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ”‪ ،“CASIO Chord‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﺴﻴﻂ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻧﻮﺗﺘﻪ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻷﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ‪C‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻻﻳﻬﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻀﺎً ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻀﺎً ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﺤﻴﻴﻦ ﺁﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻳﻀﺎً ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ C) C‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‬
‫‪E F‬‬
‫‪C C#DE b‬‬
‫‪F#GAb A Bb‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪C C#DE E F‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫‪ C) Cm‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪E F‬‬
‫‪C C#DE b‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪F#GAb A Bb‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪C C#DE b E‬‬
‫‪ C) C7‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ(‬
‫‪C C#DE b E F F#GAb A Bb B C C#DE b E F‬‬
‫‪ C) Cm7‬ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‬
‫‪C C#DE b E F F#GAb A Bb B C C#DE b E F‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﺼﻨﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻳﺎً ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻀﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺳﻮﺩﺍء‪.‬‬
‫■ ‪Full Range Chord‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﺒﻊ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-155‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-18 (ACCOMP ON/OFF‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-15‬‬
‫)‪.(EXIT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫■ ‪Fingered 1، 2، 3‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺣﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﺻﺒﻊ ﻭﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-155‬‬
‫‪ :Fingered 1‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪ :Fingered 2‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ،Fingered 1‬ﺍﻷﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺱ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Fingered 3‬ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ،Fingered 1‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-28‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﺖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻻﻧﻤﺎﻁ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ L-13‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪L-16‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪L-16‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء *‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪L-15‬‬
‫‪L-14‬‬
‫‪L-13‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻼﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ *‬
‫ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ *‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫*‪:١‬‬
‫*‪:٢‬‬
‫*‪:٣‬‬
‫*‪:٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﻟﻚ ﻟﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺳﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺬﻫﺐ ﺟﻴﺪﺍً ﻣﻊ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-8‬‬
‫)‪ ،([E] PIANO RHYTHMS‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-9‬‬
‫)‪.([F] USER RHYTHMS‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ *‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٢‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ‪ ،UPPER 2 ،UPPER 1‬ﻭ ‪LOWER‬‬
‫– ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ‪ ،UPPER 2 ،UPPER 1‬ﻭ‬
‫‪LOWER‬‬
‫– ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‬
‫– ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫– ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫– ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫– ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫– ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫• ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‪ ،‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ F‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻳﺠﺮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-15 (VARIATION/FILL-IN‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺃﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٧‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-26‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﻣﻦ ‪ F:001‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.(F:100‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٣‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-29‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻳﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻤﻨﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ‪.١٢‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-18‬‬
‫)‪.(AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍً ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪.HARMONIZE‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-18‬‬
‫)‪ (AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻲء‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-18‬‬
‫)‪ (AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍً ﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ ‪AUTO‬‬
‫‪ HARMONIZE‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺪﻯ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (012‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫‪001‬‬
‫‪Duet 1‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺃﻏﻼﻕ )ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺪﺭﺟﺘﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ( ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪002‬‬
‫‪Duet 2‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﻓﺘﺢ )ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﺑﺄﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ( ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪ 1-‬ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪003‬‬
‫‪Country‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﻔﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪004‬‬
‫‪Octave‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪005‬‬
‫‪5th‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺴﺔ‬
‫‪006‬‬
‫‪3WayOpen‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ ‪-2‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪007‬‬
‫‪3WayClos‬‬
‫‪008‬‬
‫‪Strings‬‬
‫‪009‬‬
‫‪4WayOpen‬‬
‫‪010‬‬
‫‪4WayClos‬‬
‫‪011‬‬
‫‪Block‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺯﻣﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪012‬‬
‫‪Big Band‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺗﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﻃﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺒﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫)ﺑﺞ ﺑﺎﻧﺪ(‬
‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻖ ‪-2‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ُ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻧﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺎ ﻟﻸﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﻮﺡ ‪-3‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻖ ‪-3‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ‬
‫ﻗﺪﺭﻩ ﺃﺭﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،012‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً )ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-21‬‬
‫‪AR-30‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ ﻟﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ )‪ T-5 (INST IN‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ )‪.T-8 (MIC IN‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ”‪ “Reverb Send‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻣﺰ‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻭ ‪ DSP‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-38‬‬
‫■ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ”‪ “Chorus‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ”‪ .“Chorus/DSP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ A01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،A16‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪B16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫‪Part Volume/Pan‬‬
‫‪Reverb Send‬‬
‫‪Master‬‬
‫‪Volume/Pan‬‬
‫‪Reverb‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪Chorus Send‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪Chorus‬‬
‫‪Volume/Pan‬‬
‫‪Mic In‬‬
‫‪Reverb Send‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫‪Inst In‬‬
‫‪Chorus Send‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ”‪ ،“Chorus/DSP‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-33‬‬
‫‪AR-31‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬
‫■ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ DSP‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ”‪ “DSP‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ”‪ .“Chorus/DSP‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ DSP‬ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪.DSP‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ A01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،A16‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪B16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫‪Part Volume/Pan‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫‪Master‬‬
‫‪Volume/Pan‬‬
‫‪Reverb Send‬‬
‫‪Reverb‬‬
‫‪DSP‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪DSP Reverb Send‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫‪DSP‬‬
‫‪Volume/Pan‬‬
‫‪DSP Volume/Pan‬‬
‫‪Off‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫‪Reverb Send‬‬
‫‪On‬‬
‫‪Mic In‬‬
‫‪DSP‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫‪Inst In‬‬
‫• ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻼ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻳﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺿﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻌﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ‪ ١٠‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﻺﺻﺪﺍء ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪،‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺧﻤﺲ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪DSP‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻼ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻧﻘﻞ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ DSP‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ‪،DSP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DSP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-35‬ﻭ ”ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-140‬‬
‫‪AR-32‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪R-15‬‬
‫‪R-13‬‬
‫‪R-14‬‬
‫‪R-16‬‬
‫‪C-7‬‬
‫‪R-17‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﺛﻴﺮ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ ،(DSP‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺎﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻫﻮ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (EFFECT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻟﻼﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪.C-7 (EFFECT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “oFF‬ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (EFFECT‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍً ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺔ ‪ REVERB‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ”‪ “oFF‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪ .‬ﻻﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍً ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ REVERB‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “oFF‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-38‬‬
‫‪AR-33‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ ،“DSP Disable‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“on‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“Chorus/DSP‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪.“Chorus‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“Chorus‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”‪) “Cho.Send‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-43‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﻟﺌﻲ ﻫﻮ ‪ 0‬ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪0‬‬
‫ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫”ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-38‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻫﺎﻡ!“ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ “DSP Disable‬ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺘﺨﻄﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ‪ DSP‬ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪“Chorus/DSP‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪) “DSP‬ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ ،(DSP‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﺑﺄﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫”‪ “DSP Disable‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ .“on‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍً ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺔ ‪ CHORUS‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪“Chorus‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ .“Chorus/DSP‬ﻻﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍً ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫‪ CHORUS‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “oFF‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ”‪“DSP‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“Chorus/DSP‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “Chorus‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ “Chorus/DSP‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫”‪) “DSP Line‬ﺧﻂ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-43‬ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“oFF‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪DSP‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫• ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭﻙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (EFFECT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (EFFECT‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ “DSP Disable‬ﻫﻮ ”‪ .“oFF‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ‬
‫”‪ “on‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“oFF‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ‬
‫)] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Chorus/DSP‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪.“DSP‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪ ،DSP‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ‪.DSP‬‬
‫‪AR-34‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“DSP‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ‪ DSP‬ﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ DSP ١٠٠‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻹﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) “DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-34‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) “DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-151‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“DSP Edit‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻮﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) ١٠٠‬ﻭ ”‪ (“ton‬ﻫﻲ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ‪ “DSP‬ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪AR-150‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻭ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻮﻗﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٠٠‬ﻫﻲ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-35‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (EFFECT‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍً ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺔ ‪ DSP‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “DSP‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“Chorus/DSP‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﻨﺰﺍﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ‪ DSP‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺿﺒﻂ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪) DSP‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ DSP‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪/‬ﻣﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ ،DSP‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ ،DSP‬ﺃﻟﺦ( ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-38‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ‪ .DSP‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪.DSP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﺟﻤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ‪DSP‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪.DSP‬‬
‫‪AR-35‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u‚ i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (–‚ +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-155‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪) “DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-37‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺧﺮﺝ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻟﻴﺪ ﺷﻮﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﻭ ‪ ٦‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺎً ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪.R-14 (NO‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-14 (YES‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭ ﺃﺳﻢ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ‪DSP‬‬
‫‪AR-36‬‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )?‪ (Replace‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎّ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺨﻔﻖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ .L-1 (POWER‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-145‬‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ‪.DSP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ ﻫﻲ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪8‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ .DSP‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬
‫‪) “DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-152‬‬
‫–‬
‫‪DSP RevSend‬‬
‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍء ‪(DSP‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎﺑﻌﺪ‪ DSP -‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *40‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ )‪ S-2 (MODULATION‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “DSP‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫”‪) “Mod Setting‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-48‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﺗﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(٨‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺷﻲء ﻣﻌﺒﻦ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “oFF‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪*8 - 1 ،*oFF‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ S-2 (MODULATION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ S-2 (MODULATION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺤﺮﺭﺍً‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪*Mod Button Assign‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪*Mod Button On Value‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫‪Mod Button Off Value‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ "‪ ."Mod Button‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻙ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Mod Button‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ .R-16 (ENTER‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪R-17‬‬
‫)‪ (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“Mod Button Assign‬‬
‫‪AR-37‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫‪R-15‬‬
‫‪R-13‬‬
‫‪R-14‬‬
‫‪R-16‬‬
‫‪C-7‬‬
‫‪R-17‬‬
‫‪C-17‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‪:‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﺰء‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻴﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺁﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺁﻻﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪ .‬ﻳﻤﺪﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺘﻮﺳﻄﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﺰء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ A01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،A16‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .B16‬ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻏﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺠﺰء ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫‪A01‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ‪UPPER 1‬‬
‫‪A02‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ‪UPPER 2‬‬
‫‪A03‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻳﺪﻭﻱ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ‪LOWER‬‬
‫‪A04‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫”ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-15‬‬
‫”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-30‬‬
‫‪A05‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪*UPPER 1‬‬
‫‪A06‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪*UPPER 2‬‬
‫‪A07‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪*LOWER‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-63‬‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-19‬‬
‫‪A09‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪A10‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-26‬‬
‫‪A11‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪A08‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪A12‬‬
‫‪ Chord 1‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪A16‬‬
‫‪Chord 5‬‬
‫‪AR-38‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪B01‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪B16‬‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ،B16‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٦‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MIDI‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ‪ CH1‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ CH16‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪MIDI‬‬
‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪” ،(AR-63‬ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪” ،(AR-137‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-140‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺟﺰء ‪ UPPER 1‬ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺟﺰء ‪ UPPER 2‬ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﺟﺰء ‪ LOWER‬ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪) “Part‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء( ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪) “Sol‬ﺳﻮﻟﻮ(‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-43‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-7 (MIXER‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (MIXER‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-15‬‬
‫)‪.(EXIT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫)‪ ،MIC/INST ،DSP ،MASTER‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ‪ A01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪/A16‬ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(B16‬‬
‫• ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )‪ ،(MASTER‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ )‪ ،(DSP‬ﺃﻭ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫)‪ (MIC/INST‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ )ﻣﻦ ‪ A01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،A16‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (B16‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ (.‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫)ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ‪ A01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪/A16‬ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(B16‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u‚ i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )‪ ،(MASTER‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ )‪ ،(DSP‬ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫)‪ (MIC/INST‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء )ﻣﻦ ‪ A01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،A16‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(B16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ A‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ B‬ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ً‬
‫ﻛﻼ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ R-17 (u‚ i‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t‚ y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً‪:‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪:‬‬
‫‪MASTER‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪) MASTER‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-41‬‬
‫‪MIC/INST‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪) MIC/INST‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-42‬‬
‫‪DSP‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪) DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-41‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ A01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ /A16‬ﻣﻦ ‪B01‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪B16‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-43‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻟﻠﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )‪ A‬ﺃﻭ ‪ (B‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﺩﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﺩﺍء‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-39‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﻮﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-158‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪R-13‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫”‪.“Initialize‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-13‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺿﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻤﺔ‬
‫”‪ “Display‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻋﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪:‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪Param‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪Meter‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (NO‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-40‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-15‬‬
‫)‪ (EXIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ”ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ ﻫﻲ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪MASTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ MASTER‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫‪Volume‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺾ )‪.L-2 (MAIN VOLUME‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪*127‬‬
‫‪Pan‬‬
‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪+63‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺏ‪ DSP -‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ”‪ “on‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ”‪ .“DSP Disable‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-33‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ”‪ .“DSP Disable‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ ،DSP‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ “DSP Disable‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“oFF‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫‪Cho/DSP‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪(DSP/‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺬﻫﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﺃﻭ ‪ *.DSP‬ﺑﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ”‪ ٢*“Chorus/DSP‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻫﻮ ”‪.“Chorus‬‬
‫‪DSP ،*Chorus‬‬
‫‪Part‬‬
‫)ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ DSP‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ )‪ (on‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ )‪ (oFF‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻤﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ‪.DSP‬‬
‫‪*on ،oFF‬‬
‫‪Volume‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪(DSP‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ‪*.DSP -‬‬
‫‪Pan‬‬
‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺧﺮﺝ ‪(DSP‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ‪ .DSP -‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪+63‬‬
‫‪Rev.Send‬‬
‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍء ﺧﺮﺝ ‪(DSP‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.DSP -‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *40‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪*127‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-31‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-33‬ﻭ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) “DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-34‬‬
‫‪AR-41‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪MIC/INST‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ MIC/INST‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺄﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ )‪ T-5 (INST IN‬ﻭ )‪.T-8 (MIC IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪Part‬‬
‫)ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ‪(Mic/Inst‬‬
‫‪Volume‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪*(Mic/Inst‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ )‪ (on‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ )‪.(oFF‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪*on ،oFF‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *80‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪Pan‬‬
‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ‪(Mic/Inst‬‬
‫‪DSP Line‬‬
‫)ﺧﻂ ‪(Mic/Inst DSP‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪+63‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪on ،*oFF‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ DSP‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rev.Send‬‬
‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ‪(Mic/Inst‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *40‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Cho.Send‬‬
‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ‪(Mic/Inst‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪N.Thresh‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫‪(Mic/Inst‬‬
‫ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻠﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺎﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻷﻥ ﺗﻤﺮ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ )ﻓﺘﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ(‪ .‬ﻻﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻤﺮﻭﺭ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻞ )ﻏﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *20‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪N.Release‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫‪(Mic/Inst‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﻟﻠﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺬﻫﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻏﻼﻕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ”‪ .“N.Thresh‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪ 0‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻘﻄﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻔﺎﺟﺊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺑﺒﻄﺄ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Auto Level‬‬
‫)ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫ﻝ ‪(Mic/Inst‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “oFF‬ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ‪ ،*oFF‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ :١‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-31‬‬
‫‪AR-42‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ A01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ A16‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.B16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪TONE‬‬
‫)ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ R-1 ([A] PIANO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪R-12‬‬
‫)‪ ([L] USER TONES‬ﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ A:001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪L:100‬‬
‫‪Part‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ )‪ (on‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺟﻪ )‪.(oFF‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺎ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﺳﻔﻞ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ MIDI‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪) “Sol‬ﺳﻮﻟﻮ( ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ ،“Sol‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪*on ،oFF‬‬
‫‪Volume‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪*127‬‬
‫‪Pan‬‬
‫)ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء‪ .‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻟﺠﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪+63‬‬
‫‪CoarseTune‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﻦ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –24‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪+24‬‬
‫‪FineTune‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺳﻨﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –99‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪+99‬‬
‫‪BendRange‬‬
‫)ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪24‬‬
‫‪DSP Line‬‬
‫)ﺧﻂ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﺠﺰء(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ DSP‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ”‪ “oFF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “on‬ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪) “Cho/DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-41‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“DSP‬‬
‫‪on ،*oFF‬‬
‫‪Rev.Send‬‬
‫)ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻟﻠﺠﺰء(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺻﺪﺍء ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،0‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻺﺻﺪﺍء ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪.127‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *40‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Cho.Send‬‬
‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ ،0‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻠﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻨﺪ ‪.127‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Scale‬‬
‫)ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺠﺰء(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-22‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ )‪ (on‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻻﺗﻄﺒﻖ )‪.(oFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ”‪.“oFF‬‬
‫‪on ،*oFF‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪AR-43‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪R-15‬‬
‫‪R-13‬‬
‫‪R-14‬‬
‫‪R-16‬‬
‫‪C-8‬‬
‫‪R-17‬‬
‫‪C-17‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻴﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ )ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ A:001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (K:128‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ K:129‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (K:147‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺄﺳﺎﺱ ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﺎﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻳﻔﻌﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺴﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻤﺎ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺼﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺃﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻋﺒﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺨﺒﻮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻤﻴﺰﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺄﺧﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺄﺧﺬﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻘﻮﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺟﻲء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ﺗﺪﺭﻳﺠﻴﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫• ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪AR-44‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫ﺧﻂ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻼﻑ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻁ‬
‫‪ :A‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ :R‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﻫﻮ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ .‬ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺟﺮﺱ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎً )ﺃﻗﻮﻯ(‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﺟﺮﺱ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻇﻼﻣﺎً )ﺃﻧﻌﻢ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ L:001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ L:100‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 100‬ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-12‬‬
‫)‪ .([L] USER TONES‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-14‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻭﺣﻔﻆ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺼﻨﻊ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-8 (TONE EDITOR‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫• ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻱ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻤﻴﺰﺓ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﻯ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻻﻗﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻐﺾ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻒ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪ ،‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ‪ ،DSP‬ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ ،DSP‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪DSP‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻼ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ ] [(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u‚ i‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t‚ y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-47‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪AR-45‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ ‪ ٤‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-17‬‬
‫)‪.(MENU‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬
‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-145‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٦‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ)‪ R-17 (u‚ i‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪R-14 (–‚ +‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-155‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )?‪ (Replace‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-46‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪.(NO‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻧﻈﺮﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-44‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*(‪ ،‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫‪AttackTime‬‬
‫)ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ReleasTime‬‬
‫)ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪CutOff‬‬
‫)ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ(‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺮﺱ ﺑﺘﻬﻮﻳﻦ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎً‬
‫ﻭﻗﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ ﻟﻴﻮﻧﺔ )ﺭﺧﻴﻢ( ﻭﻧﻌﻮﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Vib.Type‬‬
‫)ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ )ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪Sin‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‬
‫‪Tri‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻴﺔ‬
‫‪Saw‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ﺃﺳﻨﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺸﺎﺭ‬
‫‪Sqr‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺑﻌﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪+63‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪+63‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪+63‬‬
‫‪Sqr ،Saw ،Tri ،*Sin‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪+63‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪+63‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪+63‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –2‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+2‬‬
‫‪Vib.Depth‬‬
‫)ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Vib.Rate‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Vib.Delay‬‬
‫)ﺗﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻷﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ‪.‬‬
‫‪Oct.Shift‬‬
‫)ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Volume‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪*127‬‬
‫‪TouchSense‬‬
‫)ﺃﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺒﺔ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ .‬ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻻﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻃﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.0‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪*+63‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *40‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Cho.Send‬‬
‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ *0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪DSP On Off‬‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ‪(DSP‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ (on) DSP‬ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ )‪ (oFF‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “on‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ‪) DSP‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :100‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ؛ ﻣﻦ ‪ 101‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ DSP :200‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪ .‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “ton‬ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ DSP‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻛﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻭﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪on ،*oFF‬‬
‫‪Rev.Send‬‬
‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء(‬
‫‪DSP‬‬
‫‪DSP Type‬‬
‫)ﻧﻮﻉ ‪(DSP‬‬
‫‪ ،*ton‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 001‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪200‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪*46‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪AR-47‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ ”‪.“DSP Type‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪DSP RevSend‬‬
‫)ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍء ‪(DSP‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺎﻫﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎﺑﻌﺪ‪.DSP -‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *40‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫‪Mod Setting‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ ﺃﻭ ‪ DSP‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.S-2 (MODULATION‬‬
‫‪DSP ،*Vib‬‬
‫‪Mod Depth‬‬
‫)ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،S-2 (MODULATION‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﻦ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪.‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪8‬‬
‫‪*Mod Button Assign‬‬
‫)ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪*Mod Button On Value‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫‪Mod Button Off Value‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ(‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ )‪ S-2 (MODULATION‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “DSP‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻝ ”‪.“Mod Setting‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٨‬ﺗﻌﻴﻦ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .(٨‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺷﻲء ﻣﻌﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺰﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫”‪ “oFF‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،*oFF‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪*8‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ S-2 (MODULATION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ S-2 (MODULATION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺤﺮﺭﺍً‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-150‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻜﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ ،DSP‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺗﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ .DSP‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪) “DSP‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-151‬ﻭ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪“DSP‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-152‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ”‪ .“Mod Button‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻙ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Mod Button‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ .R-16 (ENTER‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪R-17‬‬
‫)‪ (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٥‬ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“Mod Button Assign‬‬
‫‪AR-48‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪R-1 - R-12‬‬
‫‪R-15‬‬
‫‪L-4 - L-9‬‬
‫‪R-16‬‬
‫‪R-17‬‬
‫‪R-14‬‬
‫‪R-13‬‬
‫‪C-17‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺑﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٠٥‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻮﻉ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﺍﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻈﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻸﺭﺗﺠﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﻤﺘﻌﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﻤﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ )ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻭﻓﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻳﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﻨﻘﺴﻢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺖ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ‪ RHYTHM‬ﻣﻦ ]‪ [A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ .[F‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ]‪ [A‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ]‪ [E‬ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ]‪ [F‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪C-10‬‬
‫‪L-14 L-16 L-18‬‬
‫‪L-15 L-17‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺘﻪ ﻭﺭﻗﻤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-7‬‬
‫)‪ ،([D] ARABIC/ORIENTAL‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-8‬‬
‫)‪.([E] PIANO RHYTHMS‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ D‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ‪ ،A ،F‬ﺍﻭ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-49‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ L-4 ([A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)‪ L-9 ([F] USER RHYTHMS‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪L-16 (SYNCHRO/ENDING‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ D‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﺪء ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-9 ([F] USER RHYTHMS‬ﻫﻮ ﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-53‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻠﻪ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﺩﺍﺋﻚ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺎَ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺗﻪ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-51‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ ،E ،F‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ H‬ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻣﺾ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-17‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ ،E ،F‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ H‬ﻻﻳﻮﻣﺾ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ .L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﺤﻦ ﻣﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ .‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻳﺼﻨﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻷﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ ٤٠‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻚ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٧‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-50‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-28‬ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-52‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ“ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻼﺕ ﻗﺪ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺑﻘﺎء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻟﺔ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﻢ ﻛﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-53‬‬
‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ‪ ،UPPER 2 ،UPPER 1‬ﻭ ‪LOWER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-15‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ‪ ،UPPER 2 ،UPPER 1‬ﻭ ‪LOWER‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-18‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻟﻼﺻﻮﺍﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-33‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-38‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-43‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ‪ ،LOWER ،UPPER 2 ،UPPER 1‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-30‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎ‬
‫)ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ( )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-21‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰء ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-126‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-52‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻼﻑ(‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-26‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-19‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫–‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺰﻑ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻛﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-53‬‬
‫‪AR-51‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-18‬‬
‫)‪ (ACCOMP ON/OFF‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪L-4‬‬
‫)‪ ([A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪L-9 ([F] USER RHYTHMS‬‬
‫ﻛﺄﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-18 (ACCOMP ON/OFF‬ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎً ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪D‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻳﺔ‬
‫)ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻫﻮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻫﻮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-52‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ L-4 ([A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)‪ L-9 ([F] USER RHYTHMS‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–‚ +‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (t‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ R-1 ([A] PIANO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪R-12‬‬
‫)‪ ([L] USER TONES‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ F:001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ F:050‬ﻫﻲ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥٠‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-9‬‬
‫)‪ .([F] USER RHYTHMS‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-49‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y, u, i‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪Synchro‬‬
‫) ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪،*Normal ،oFF‬‬
‫‪،Variation‬‬
‫‪Intro‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪،B - *C‬‬
‫‪Bm - Cm‬‬
‫‪،B - *C‬‬
‫‪Bm - Cm‬‬
‫‪oFF ،*on‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-49‬ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪IntroChd‬‬
‫)ﻭﺗﺮ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-51‬‬
‫‪EndingChd‬‬
‫)ﻭﺗﺮ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫‪AutoFill‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‬
‫)‪ (on‬ﺃﻭ ﻻﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ )‪ (oFF‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪Timing‬‬
‫)ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ(‬
‫‪،*Normal‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫‪،Double ،Half‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻸﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻼﻓﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ‪3/2 ،3/4‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫”ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-55‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ‪) MP‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ( ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ )‪ (١‬ﻭ )‪ (٢‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭ ‪.MP‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-16 (ENTER‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-57‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “Parameter‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-53‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ”‪ “Store‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪R-14 (–, +‬‬
‫ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-155‬‬
‫• ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )?‪ (Replace‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬
‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-145‬‬
‫‪AR-54‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٦‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪.(NO‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-17 (MENU‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭ ‪) MP‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ”‪ “Clear‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ”‪) “Timing‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ( ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-53‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪Normal‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪Half‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺘﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪:‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪C7‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Am‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪EM7‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪G7‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dm‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dm‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪A7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ “Half‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻘﻪ ﺃﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﻪ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻭﻗﺖ ‪.4/4‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ‪ Half‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ 4/4‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Am C7‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪EM7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dm G7‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dm A7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ‪ Half‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ 2/4‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EM7 Am C7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dm G7‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dm A7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫• ‪Double‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺘﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﻌﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ ”‪ “Half‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ”‪ “Double‬ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ‪ Double‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ 4/4‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Am‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dm‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ‪ Double‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ 8/4‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪G7‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dm‬‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪A7‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪AR-55‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫• ‪3/4‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺘﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ 3/4‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪.6/8‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ ”‪ “Half‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ”‪ “3/4‬ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ‪ 3/4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ 4/4‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Am C7‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪EM7‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Dm G7‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪Dm A7‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ‪ 3/4‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ 6/8‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Am‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪EM7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪G7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dm‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪A7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫• ‪3/2‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺘﺎﺕ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ 3/2‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪.6/4‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ ”‪ “Half‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ”‪ “3/2‬ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ‪ 3/2‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ 4/4‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪C7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪EM7 Am‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪G7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dm‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪A7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dm‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ‪ 3/2‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ 6/4‬ﻣﺨﺼﺺ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Am‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪EM7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪G7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dm‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪5‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪A7‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪Dm‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “Double‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “3/2‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﺃﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻻﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-56‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ ﻛﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻷﻧﻄﻼﻕ ﻭﺣﻔﻈﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫•‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-49‬ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺨﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-51‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ‪) MP‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ( ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺍﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻜﻠﻤﺔ ”‪.“Chord Edit‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ )”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ“‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-58‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ )”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ“‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-58‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ“‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-58‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )”‪ ،“Initialize‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-60‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ )”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻸﻭﺗﺎﺭ“‪،‬‬
‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-59‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ )”‪ ،“Key Shift‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-60‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎً ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ )”‪ ،“Append Chord‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-60‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )”‪،“Delete Measure‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-60‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ )”‪،“Insert Measure‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ“‪ ،‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-60‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ‪.MP‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٩‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-53‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﻮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‬
‫‪AR-57‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-57‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-57‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-10 (DELETE‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ L-15 (dFF‬ﻭ )‪ L-14 (sREW‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-10 (DELETE‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ‪٣‬‬
‫‪09 10 11‬‬
‫‪002:1:00‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ C‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ Bm‬ﺍﻟﺤﺎﺩﺙ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ‪١‬‬
‫‪ 00 01 02‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ‬
‫‪001:1:00‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻳﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ )ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ :‬ﺿﺮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﺗﻜﺔ( ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-58‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-57‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺄﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-11 (INSERT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ”ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ“ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺯﻣﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻣﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ١٢ ،‬ﺗﻜﺔ ﺗﺴﺎﻭﻱ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺑﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .١١‬ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١٢‬ﺗﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪ ،٤/٤‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ )‪ (2‬ﻫﻲ ‪ ١٢‬ﺗﻜﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺗﺔ )‪ (6‬ﻫﻲ ‪ ٦‬ﺗﻜﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻛﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺿﺮﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫)‪R-1 (5‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﺘﻴﻦ‬
‫)‪R-2 (1‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫)‪R-3 (2‬‬
‫‪ ٢/١‬ﺿﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫)‪R-7 (6‬‬
‫‪ ٤/١‬ﺿﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫)‪R-8 (7‬‬
‫• ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-8 (7‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )•( ‪ R-4‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪.١٫٥‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-10 (,‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪.٣/٢‬‬
‫• ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-9 (8‬ﻭ )‪ R-11 (.‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ”‪ “ROOT‬ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻫﻮ ‪.C‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻸﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-57‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-14 (STEP‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ –ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ”‪،“TYPE‬‬
‫ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ”‪ “ROOT‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ ،”TYPE‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ“‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-89‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-9 (8‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺩﺳﺔ ﻋﺸﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ L-15 (dFF‬ﻭ )‪ L-14 (sREW‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-28‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻫﻨﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﻥ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ‪ ٥‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﻭﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-59‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫)‪(Insert Measure‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﺪﻓﻖ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-57‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “InsertMeas.‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ‬
‫)] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Size‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﻢ ﺑﺄﺭﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪ C-‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻭﻝ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ‪.٩٩٩‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫)‪(Initialize‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Initialize‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫)‪(Key Shift‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Key Shift‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ‪ –5‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.+6‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪ .١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Append Chord‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎً ﺑﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫)‪(Append Chord‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫)‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫)‪Delete‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫‪(Measure‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪AR-60‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “DeleteMeas.‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ‬
‫)] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Size‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺧﺬﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻹﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪L-1‬‬
‫‪R-14‬‬
‫‪C-11 C-13 C-15 C-17‬‬
‫‪C-10 C-12 C-14 C-16‬‬
‫ﺗﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻇﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﻲ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-158‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻼﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”‪) RegFltAcmp‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-127‬ﻭ‬
‫”‪) RegFltScal‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-127‬‬
‫‪C-16‬‬
‫‪C-15‬‬
‫‪C-14‬‬
‫‪C-13‬‬
‫‪C-12‬‬
‫‪C-11‬‬
‫‪C-10‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٦‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪C-10‬‬
‫)‪ (BANK‬ﻭ )‪ C-11 (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ C-16 (6‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 6‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 5‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 4‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 3‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪1-1‬‬
‫‪1-2‬‬
‫‪1-3‬‬
‫‪1-4‬‬
‫‪1-5‬‬
‫‪1-6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ‪2‬‬
‫‪2-1‬‬
‫‪2-2‬‬
‫‪2-3‬‬
‫‪2-4‬‬
‫‪2-5‬‬
‫‪2-6‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ‪16‬‬
‫‪16-1‬‬
‫‪16-2‬‬
‫‪16-3‬‬
‫‪16-4‬‬
‫‪16-5‬‬
‫‪16-6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ‪1‬‬
‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-10 (BANK‬ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.١٦‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ )‪ C-11 (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ C-16 (6‬ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ‪.١‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.1-1‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.1-2‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺚ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.1-3‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪1-1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪1-2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪1-3‬‬
‫‪E:016‬‬
‫‪H:001‬‬
‫‪A:001‬‬
‫‪A:015‬‬
‫‪E:013‬‬
‫‪A:044‬‬
‫‪080‬‬
‫‪140‬‬
‫‪089‬‬
‫‪AR-61‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-10 (BANK‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-10 (BANK‬ﺗﺪﻭﺭ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﻙ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-10 (BANK‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ C-11 (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ C-16 (6‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎﺋﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”‪ “BANK‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-10‬‬
‫)‪ ،(BANK‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﺒﻀﻌﺔ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،C-17 (STORE‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ )‪ C-11 (1‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ C-16 (6‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ )ﻳﺤﺬﻑ(‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﻀﺒﻂ ‪2-1‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬
‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-145‬‬
‫‪AR-62‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪6-1‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-18‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﻭﺙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺃﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻻﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫) ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪R-1 - R-12‬‬
‫‪C-5 C-6 C-7‬‬
‫‪R-15‬‬
‫‪R-16‬‬
‫‪R-17‬‬
‫‪R-14‬‬
‫‪R-13‬‬
‫‪R-19‬‬
‫‪R-20‬‬
‫‪C-17‬‬
‫‪C-11‬‬
‫‪C-14‬‬
‫‪C-10 C-12 C-13‬‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻼ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ( ﻭ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩﺗﻬﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ )ﺣﺪﺙ(‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺴﺔ ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ )ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٣٠٠٠٠‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻉ( ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬
‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-145‬‬
‫‪L-13 L-15‬‬
‫‪L-14‬‬
‫‪L-17‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ )‪(EASY REC‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ‪ EASY REC‬ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺯﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ‪ EASY REC‬ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-65‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ EASY REC‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-49‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫‪ EASY REC‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-65‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ EASY REC‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﻳﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺃﺩﺍﺋﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪) “16‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-66‬ﻭ ”ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-66‬‬
‫• ﺃﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ،٢‬ﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺣﺬﺭﻙ ﺑﺄﻧﻚ ﻻﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-63‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-6 (RECORD‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ EASY REC‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ )‪ (e‬ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ .A‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-65‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪L-14 ،L-13 (INTRO‬‬
‫)‪ ،(NORMAL/FILL-IN‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-15‬‬
‫)‪(VARIATION/FILL-IN‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ .L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-6 (RECORD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫)‪ (MEASURE‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ )‪.(BEAT‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ‪ (S-1) PITCH BEND‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻳﻀﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )‪ (MEASURE‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫)‪ (BEAT‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪0‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻝ ”‪) “Beat‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-74‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤/٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٤/٨‬ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ ٨/٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٨/١٦‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Metronome‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Precount‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ –ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٤‬‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-64‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-5‬‬
‫)‪ (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ EASY REC‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺿﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-49‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-6 (RECORD‬‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺑﺴﻂ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻫﻮ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ EASY REC‬ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-63‬ﻭﺍﻗﻌﻴﺎً‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻜﺲ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪-‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٧‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﺠﻤﻴﻌﻬﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ‪،‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎً ﺑﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻤﻴﺰ ﺧﺼﺎﺋﺺ ﺍﻵﻻﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ EASY REC‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺿﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-49‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺻﻨﻊ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٧‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ‪ ١٧‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻘﻄﻴﻌﻬﻢ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪A04‬‬
‫‪A05‬‬
‫‪A06‬‬
‫‪A07‬‬
‫‪A09‬‬
‫‪A10‬‬
‫‪A11‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-6 (RECORD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫)‪ (MEASURE‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ )‪(BEAT‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-5‬‬
‫)‪ (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪01‬‬
‫❘‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪16‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪A12‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-74‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪(UPPER 1‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪(UPPER 2‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪(LOWER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪(Chord 1‬‬
‫‪A13‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪(Chord 2‬‬
‫‪A14‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪(Chord 3‬‬
‫‪A15‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪(Chord 4‬‬
‫‪A16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪(Chord 5‬‬
‫‪B01‬‬
‫❘‬
‫‪B16‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪(B01‬‬
‫❘‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪(B16‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ .‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺟﺰء ﺁﻟﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻋﻼﻩ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-38‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ B10‬ﻫﻮ ﺟﺰء ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-65‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪16‬‬
‫■ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫– ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ A04‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ A07‬ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) B16‬ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬
‫– ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ A09‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :A16‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺧﻂ ‪DSP‬‬
‫– ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ :DSP‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ‬
‫■ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪S-2 (MODULATION‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫■ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺰﺍء ‪ ،UPPER 2 ،UPPER 1‬ﻭ ‪LOWER‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ‪ ،UPPER 2 ،UPPER 1‬ﻭ ‪LOWER‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-126‬‬
‫– ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰء ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪(.EASY REC‬‬
‫■ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪L-15 ،L-14 (NORMAL/FILL-IN) ،L-13 (INTRO‬‬
‫)‪ ،(VARIATION/FILL-IN‬ﻭ )‪.L-16 (SYNCHRO/ENDING‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺪﻋﺎﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻻﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻣﻦ )‪ D-6 (KEY C‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪D-17 (KEY B‬‬
‫‪AR-66‬‬
‫• ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺗﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎً ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻔﻮﻅ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪(A01) UPPER 1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪(A05) UPPER 1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪(A02) UPPER 2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪(A06) UPPER 2‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪(A03) LOWER‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪(A07) LOWER‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(A04‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )‪(A04‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻻﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-65‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﻄﻠﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪16‬‬
‫■ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫■ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫• ﺃﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫• ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫– ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) B16‬ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻭﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻳﻀﺎً‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ“ ﻻﻧﻬﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻳﻄﻠﻖ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ“‬
‫• ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ”ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻊ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪) “16‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪” ،(AR-66‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-66‬ﻭ ”ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪“16‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-66‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﻢ ﻛﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-73‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٧‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪01‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .16‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﻣﺎﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻔﻌﻠﻪ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-65‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﺩﺍء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً ﻷﺩﺍﺋﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ )ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪) “16‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-66‬ﻭ ”ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-66‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-71‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪0‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻝ ”‪) “Beat‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ L‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪ M‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (16‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ،M‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )‪ (e‬ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ) ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-66‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-6 (RECORD‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٧‬ﺧﺬ ﺣﺬﺭﻙ ﺑﺄﻧﻚ ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤/٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٤/٨‬ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ ٨/٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٨/١٦‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Metronome‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Precount‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٧‬‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-67‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪16‬‬
‫• ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ ،“RecType‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪L-14 ،L-13 (INTRO‬‬
‫)‪ ،(NORMAL/FILL-IN‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-15‬‬
‫)‪(VARIATION/FILL-IN‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ .L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻟﺒﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-6 (RECORD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫)‪ (MEASURE‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ )‪.(BEAT‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ‪ (S-1) PITCH BEND‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻳﻀﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )‪ (MEASURE‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫)‪ (BEAT‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ‪ L‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ‪ M‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (16‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً‪ .‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ،M‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )‪.(e‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻷﺳﻮﺩ ) ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ‬
‫ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-74‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-5‬‬
‫)‪ (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-66‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-6 (RECORD‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٧‬ﺧﺬ ﺣﺬﺭﻙ ﺑﺄﻧﻚ ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-68‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪01‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪.(16‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً ﻷﺩﺍﺋﻚ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٥‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “RecType‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “REPL‬ﺃﻭ ”‪.“OVDB‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪RecType‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) REPL‬ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ(‬
‫ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) OVDB‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻴﻪ(‬
‫)‪ (٦‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪) *“16‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-66‬ﻭ ”ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪) “16‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-66‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-71‬‬
‫* ﻗﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪0‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻝ”‪) “Beat‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪C-6 (RECORD‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )‪ (MEASURE‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ )‪.(BEAT‬‬
‫ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-17‬‬
‫)‪ (START/STOP‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺠﻠﺔ ‪ (S-1) PITCH BEND‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻳﻀﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )‪ (MEASURE‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫)‪ (BEAT‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-74‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-5‬‬
‫)‪ (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤/٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٤/٨‬ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ ٨/٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٨/١٦‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Metronome‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Precount‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻋﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ –ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٧‬‬
‫‪AR-69‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-13‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫”‪.“ClearTrack‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-13‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻀﻐﻄﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “ClearSong‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”‪ .“Clear Song‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻓﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ”?‪.“Sure‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”‪ .“Clear Track‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ”?‪.“Sure‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-80‬‬
‫‪AR-70‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻋﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-77‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،(C-6 (RECORD‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ )ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-6‬‬
‫)‪ .((RECORD‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (MIXER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (MIXER‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﻄﺎء‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ .‬ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺃﻋﻴﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً‬
‫)ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ( ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ A04‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،A07‬ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ A09‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪A16‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪B16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻺﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎً ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﻭﺳﻮ ﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﺬﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻫﻲ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻐﻴﺮﺕ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎً‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺃﺧﻴﺮﺍً ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺪ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء( ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-66‬ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ‪A06 ،(UPPER 1) A05‬‬
‫)‪ ،(LOWER) A07 ،(UPPER 2‬ﻭ ‪A04‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ )ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(B16‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-6 (RECORD‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-6 (RECORD‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻀﻮﺭ‪ /‬ﺍﻹﻧﺼﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ )ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء( ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﺎ )ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (B16‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ .16‬ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻇﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺨﻼﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-38‬‬
‫‪AR-71‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﻢ ﻳﺴﺎﻋﺪﻭﻙ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻭﺳﻬﻮﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-74‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻌﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ* ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻪ‪ .‬ﻋﺎﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻀﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺗﻜﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻭ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-82‬‬
‫* ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-83‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-15 (dFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-14‬‬
‫)‪.(sREW‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-16 (PAUSE‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-16 (PAUSE‬‬
‫ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﻈﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ؛ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ*‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻜﺲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-6 (RECORD‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-6 (RECORD‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-6 (RECORD‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-6 (RECORD‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻀﻮﺭ‪ /‬ﺍﻹﻧﺼﺮﺍﻑ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “Auto‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫”‪.“Mode‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺗﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻘﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ً C-6 (RECORD‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٨‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﻘﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-6 (RECORD‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲء )ﻣﻨﻄﻔﺄ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﻬﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-6‬‬
‫)‪ (RECORD‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻀﻲء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎً ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻔﺖ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-72‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-75‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-13 (REPEAT‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-17‬‬
‫)‪.(START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٦‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ )ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-71‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-13 (REPEAT‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ? ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﻛﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ“‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺛﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ”ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫”ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫• ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫– ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ A04‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ A07‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) B16‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬
‫– ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ A09‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ :A16‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ‪DSP‬‬
‫– ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ :DSP‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‬
‫• ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ ،UPPER 1‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ ،UPPER 2‬ﻭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪LOWER‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻀﻲء ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-6 (RECORD‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-6‬‬
‫)‪ (RECORD‬ﻣﻨﻄﻔﺄ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ .L-17 (START/STOP‬ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎً‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪) “EOT‬ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ( ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “OFF‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻻﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻷﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻌﻜﺴﻮﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺘﻬﺎ ﻛﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺍﺟﻬﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ‪ ،UPPER 2 ،UPPER 1‬ﻭ ‪ LOWER‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫‪ ،(UPPER 2) A06 ،(UPPER 1) A05‬ﻭ ‪.(LOWER) A07‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-73‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪0‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ”‪.“PanelRecord‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪R-14 (NO‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻏﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫• ﻋﺰﻑ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫• ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﺳﻢ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (−, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ‪ ،UPPER 2 ،UPPER 1‬ﻭ ‪ LOWER‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫‪ ،(UPPER 2) A06 ،(UPPER 1) A05‬ﻭ ‪.(LOWER) A07‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-74‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-15 (dFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-14 (sREW‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-16 (PAUSE‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-16 (PAUSE‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-139‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺘﻮﻗﻔﺎً ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻝ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪L-15 (dFF‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-14‬‬
‫)‪ .(sREW‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ A04‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ A07‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻤﻔﺮﺩﻩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-13 (REPEAT‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (MIXER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ A04‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،A16‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(B16‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪ UPPER 1‬ﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ .A05‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-38‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [(‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Part‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-14 (+‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ”‪ “001:01:00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )‪،(A‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﺪء‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (i‬ﺛﻼﺙ ﻣﺮﺍﺕ ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-14 (+‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ )‪ (B‬ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺎً ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪) “Sol‬ﺳﻮﻟﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎُ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-17‬‬
‫)‪.(START/STOP‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-13 (REPEAT‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ? ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-75‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻐﻠﻖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻭﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺗﻴﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫– ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-88‬‬
‫– ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-89‬‬
‫– ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-91‬‬
‫– ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-92‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻭ ﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫• ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺎﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫• ﺇﺳﺘﺨﻼﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ 04‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ 07‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ 09‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-5 (EDIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “Song Edit‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-76‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ AR-76‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫”‪.“Clear‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“To‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Clear Song‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻻﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻟﺘﺴﺄﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “All‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ AR-76‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪“Copy‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”‪ .“Copy Song‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“Copy‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-77‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ AR-76‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ AR-76‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “DeleteMeas.‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “InsertMeas.‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪ .“Insert Measure‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﺄﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“Measure‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪ .“Delete Measure‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻓﺄﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“Measure‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪.“Size‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪.“Size‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪ 002‬ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ”‪ “Measure‬ﻭ ‪003‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺤﺠﻢ ”‪ “Size‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪ ٢‬ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-78‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ 04‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 07‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ‪ 09‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺎً ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-65‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ )ﻣﻦ ‪ A04‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪،A07‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ A09‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .(A16‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪04‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺘﻲ ‪ 07‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ‪ 09‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ،16‬ﻣﻊ ﺟﺰء ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺐ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫‪B04‬‬
‫‪B05‬‬
‫‪B06‬‬
‫‪B07‬‬
‫‪B09‬‬
‫‪B10‬‬
‫‪B11‬‬
‫‪B12‬‬
‫‪B13‬‬
‫‪B14‬‬
‫‪B15‬‬
‫‪B16‬‬
‫‪A04‬‬
‫‪A05‬‬
‫‪A06‬‬
‫‪A07‬‬
‫‪A09‬‬
‫‪A10‬‬
‫‪A11‬‬
‫‪A12‬‬
‫‪A13‬‬
‫‪A14‬‬
‫‪A15‬‬
‫‪A16‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ AR-76‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Rename‬ﻭﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Rename‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺣﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫)‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-155‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻸﺳﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪04‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 07‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ‪ 09‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،16‬ﻭﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ AR-76‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “Extract‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪ “Extract‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺮﺍﺝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-79‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪.(16‬‬
‫• ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫• ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫• ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ“‬
‫ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-80‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Clear Track‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪ C-5 (EDIT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “TrackEdit‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ ﺍﻻﺳﻮﺩ ) ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻠﻰ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍً ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪.R-14 (–, +‬‬
‫‪AR-80‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺁﺧﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ“‬
‫ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-80‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪“Copy‬‬
‫ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪ .“Copy Track‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪.“Copy‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻣﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“To‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻻﻳﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﺴﺄﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ 16‬ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻻﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩﻫﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 03‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ 05‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ .06‬ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.03‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-80‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Merge‬ﻭﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪ “Merge Track‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪BC‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩﻩ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫‪ ١‬ﻫﻮ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻵﺧﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :‬ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺪﻳﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) 05‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫‪ (05‬ﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ i‬ﺃﻭ ‪ R-17 (t‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ‪) 06‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫‪ (06‬ﻝ ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪ ‬ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-81‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻻﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻹﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻓﻮﺭﺍُ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﺗﺴﺄﻝ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-5 (EDIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻻﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-80‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻛﺎ ”ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ“‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻳﺨﺰﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﻐﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬
‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬
‫• ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‬
‫• ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﻲ* ﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ )‪(View Select‬‬
‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ‬
‫• ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ )ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ(‬
‫* ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-82‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-83‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻛﻘﻴﻢ ﻭ ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ )ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ‪” .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ“ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ‪٩٦‬‬
‫ﺗﻜﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤/٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (٤/٨‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤٨‬ﺗﻜﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪٨/٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(٨/١٦‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ “Bend” .‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (٢‬ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ”ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ“‪ .‬ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ )ﻋﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ ((١‬ﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻭﺗﻮﺿﺢ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ )ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ“ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-84‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ( )ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )ﺧﻂ ﻣﺼﻤﺖ(‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻗﺒﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ( ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ( ﻟﻠﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﺳﻔﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫■ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻧﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :١‬ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪R-17‬‬
‫)‪ (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﺪﻭﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ‪.‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ ﻛﺎ ”‪) .“MEAS.‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‪) “BEAT” ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ(‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ”‪) “TICK‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫• ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪ :٢‬ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫‪AR-83‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫■ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻸﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭ ﺍﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ”‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ“ ﻭ ”‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ“ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﻮﺍﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ ‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-83‬‬
‫• ”‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ“ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺭﺅﻭﺱ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-89‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻭﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺋﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫‪TOP‬‬
‫)ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ(‬
‫—‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫]‪[Note‬‬
‫‪Bend‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫‪Mod‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ*‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬
‫‪NOTE‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫‪*G9 - C0 - C-‬‬
‫‪GATE‬‬
‫ﺯﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ‬
‫‪99:95 - 00:00‬‬
‫‪VEL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫]‪[Bend‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫]‪[Modulat‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫‪Sus‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‬
‫]‪[Sustain‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‬
‫‪127 - 000‬‬
‫‪Soft‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫]‪[Soft‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫‪127 - 000‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪Sost‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫]‪[Sostenu‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫‪ModB‬‬
‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫]‪[ModBttn‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫‪END‬‬
‫)ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ(‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫—‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪127 - 001‬‬
‫‪+8191 - 0000 - –8192‬‬
‫‪127 - 000‬‬
‫‪127 - 000‬‬
‫‪oFF ،on‬‬
‫)ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ(‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻻﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﺄﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻯ ﻛﺄﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ )‪ ،C4‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪(.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ”‪ “C-‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) C-1‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪.(C0‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-89‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪L:100 - A:001‬‬
‫‪TONE‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[Tone‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪Vol‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[Volume‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪Pan‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[Pan‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪+63 - 00 - –64‬‬
‫‪CTun‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﻦ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[CrsTune‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﻦ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫‪+24 - 00 - –24‬‬
‫‪FTun‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[FinTune‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫‪+99 - 00 - –99‬‬
‫‪BndR‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[BendRng‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪24 - 00‬‬
‫‪127 - 000‬‬
‫‪RSnd‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[RevSend‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫‪127 - 000‬‬
‫‪CSnd‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[ChoSend‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫‪127 - 000‬‬
‫‪SclE‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[ScaleEn‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫‪oFF ،on‬‬
‫‪DspL‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[DspLine‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫‪oFF ،on‬‬
‫‪Exp‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ*‬
‫]‪[Express‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-89‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-84‬‬
‫‪127 - 000‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪L:100 - A:001‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫‪TnU1‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪UPPER 1‬‬
‫]‪[Tone_U1‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪TnU2‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪UPPER 2‬‬
‫]‪[Tone_U2‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪L:100 - A:001‬‬
‫‪TnLo‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ‪LOWER‬‬
‫]‪[Tone_Lo‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪L:100 - A:001‬‬
‫‪TnHm‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫]‪[Tone_Hm‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪L:100 - A:001‬‬
‫‪ROOT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫]‪[Chord‬‬
‫‪TYPE‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪CVEL‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪127 - 000‬‬
‫‪RHY‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫]‪[Rhythm‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫‪F:100 - A:001‬‬
‫‪Rctl‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫]‪[RhyCtrl‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫‪APrt‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫]‪[AcmpPrt‬‬
‫‪PART‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪oFF ،on‬‬
‫‪Layr‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫]‪[Layer‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫‪oFF ،on‬‬
‫‪Shft‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫]‪[OctShift‬‬
‫‪PART‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪+2 - 0 - –2‬‬
‫‪Splt‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‬
‫]‪[Split‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‬
‫‪oFF ،on‬‬
‫‪TMPO‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫]‪[Tempo‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫‪255 - 30‬‬
‫‪SplP‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‬
‫]‪[SplitPt‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‬
‫‪*G9 - C0 - C-‬‬
‫‪HmAp‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪ /‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫]‪[HarmArp‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫‪ApHd‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫]‪[ArpHold‬‬
‫‪ApSp‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪B-C‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫‪،BASS ،DRUM ،PERC‬‬
‫‪CHD5 - CHD1‬‬
‫‪LOWR ،UPP2 ،UPP1‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ‪162 - 001 ،oFF‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪oFF ،on‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫]‪[ArpSpd‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪8 ،6 ،4S ،4 ،3 ،2S ،2 ،1‬‬
‫‪ApPt‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫]‪[ArpPart‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪LOWER ،UPPER‬‬
‫‪Revb‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‬
‫]‪[Reverb‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‬
‫‪10 - 01 ،oFF‬‬
‫‪Chrs‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫]‪[Chorus‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫‪5-1‬‬
‫‪DSP‬‬
‫‪DSP‬‬
‫]‪[DSP‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫‪DSP‬‬
‫‪200 - 001 ،ton‬‬
‫‪Scal‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪NOTE‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‬
‫‪B-C‬‬
‫]‪[Scale‬‬
‫‪Cent‬‬
‫ﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫‪+99 - 00 - –99‬‬
‫‪Vol‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪PART‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[Volume‬‬
‫‪،LOWR ،UPP2 ،UPP1‬‬
‫‪HARM‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪Pan‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪PART‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[Pan‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪CTun‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺧﺸﻦ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫‪PART‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[CrsTune‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺧﺸﻦ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫‪FTun‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫‪PART‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[FinTune‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫‪BndR‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪PART‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[BendRng‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪127 - 000‬‬
‫‪،LOWR ،UPP2 ،UPP1‬‬
‫‪HARM‬‬
‫‪+63 - 00 - –64‬‬
‫‪،LOWR ،UPP2 ،UPP1‬‬
‫‪HARM‬‬
‫‪+24 - 00 - –24‬‬
‫‪،LOWR ،UPP2 ،UPP1‬‬
‫‪HARM‬‬
‫‪+99 - 00 - –99‬‬
‫‪،LOWR ،UPP2 ،UPP1‬‬
‫‪HARM‬‬
‫‪24 - 00‬‬
‫‪AR-85‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪PART‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪،LOWR ،UPP2 ،UPP1‬‬
‫‪HARM‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪PART‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪PART‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫‪٥‬‬
‫]‪[AcmpVol‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫‪127 - 000‬‬
‫‪٦‬‬
‫]‪[AcmpScl‬‬
‫‪VALU‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ‬
‫‪oFF ،on‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫‪RSnd‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[RevSend‬‬
‫‪CSnd‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻛﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[ChoSend‬‬
‫‪DspL‬‬
‫ﺧﻂ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫]‪[DspLine‬‬
‫‪AVol‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ*‬
‫‪AScl‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ*‬
‫‪127 - 000‬‬
‫‪،LOWR ،UPP2 ،UPP1‬‬
‫‪HARM‬‬
‫‪127 - 000‬‬
‫‪،LOWR ،UPP2 ،UPP1‬‬
‫‪HARM‬‬
‫‪oFF ،on‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺣﺪﺙ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻻﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻛﺄﺳﻢ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺮﻯ ﻛﺄﺳﻢ ﻟﺠﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ )‪ ،C‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪(.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-155‬‬
‫*‪ :Intro ٣‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ :norml ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ :Vari ،‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪ :nFlOn ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ :nFloF ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ :vFlOn ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺣﺸﻮ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪:vFloF ،‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺣﺸﻮ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ‪ :Endin ،‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء‬
‫*‪ ٤‬ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ”‪ “-C‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) C-1‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪.(C0‬‬
‫*‪ ٥‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ”‪) “AccompVol.‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-128‬‬
‫*‪ ٦‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻘﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻡ ﻻ )ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺐ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-25‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ AR-82‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ )‪(Quick Play‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-82‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫‪AR-86‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫)‪(View Select‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ“‬
‫ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-82‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (i‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻔﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻟﺜﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻋﻨﺪ ”‪.“ViewSelect‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“View Select‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ L-15 (dFF‬ﻭ )‪ L-14 (sREW‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫”‪ ،“VEL‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻛﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﻐﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻐﻴﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺑﻴﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺑﻴﻦ ”‪) “on‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ( ﻭ ”‪) “oFF‬ﻳﺨﺘﻔﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺒﻊ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪Note‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫‪PitchBend‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫‪Pedal‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺳﺘﻴﻨﻮﺗﻮ‬
‫‪Rhythm‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫‪Chord‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪Tempo‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫‪Tone‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪Mixer‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ )ﻣﺎﻋﺪﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ(‬
‫‪Others‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t، y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-10 (DELETE‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-10 (DELETE‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-83‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭ ﺧﺮﻭﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫”‪.“View Select‬‬
‫‪AR-87‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-17 (MENU‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “Delete‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-17 (MENU‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “Delete‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Delete‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-75‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Delete‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ ،“All‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺤﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ )‪“(Quick Play‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫‪AR-88‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Locator‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ |ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻛﺤﺪﺙ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-11 (INSERT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﺑﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺑﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-83‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٣‬ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪“Insert‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻭ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-83‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻨﻮﻉ ﻟﻠﺤﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ )ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ( ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﻣﻠﺔ‬
‫)‪R-1 (5‬‬
‫ﻧﺼﻒ‬
‫)‪R-2 (1‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻧﺴﺨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫)‪R-3 (2‬‬
‫ﺛﻤﻦ‬
‫)‪R-7 (6‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﺱ ﻋﺸﺮ‬
‫)‪R-8 (7‬‬
‫‪024:01:00‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﻰ ﻭﺛﻼﺛﻮﻥ‬
‫)‪R-9 (8‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻘﻄﺔ*‬
‫)•( ‪R-4‬‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ*‬
‫)‪R-10 (,‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪020:01:00‬‬
‫‪018:01:00‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ )‪“(Quick Play‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺩﻯ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺿﻒ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-3 (2‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )•( ‪.R-4‬‬
‫‪AR-89‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-12 (COPY‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Copy‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-75‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-13 (QUANTIZE‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Quantize‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫‪ ‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ )ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ‪ -‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ(‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Cursor‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﺴﺎﺏ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫”‪ “Complete‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪ “Copy‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ”‪ ‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ“ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ”‪ ‬ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ“‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪026:01:00‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪024:01:00‬‬
‫‪020:01:00‬‬
‫‪018:01:00‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﻨﺴﺦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺁﺧﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﻭﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٦‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻊ‬
‫)‪R-3 (2‬‬
‫ﺛﻤﻦ‬
‫)‪R-7 (6‬‬
‫ﺳﺎﺩﺱ ﻋﺸﺮ‬
‫)‪R-8 (7‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﻰ ﻭﺛﻼﺛﻮﻥ‬
‫)‪R-9 (8‬‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ*‬
‫)‪R-10 (,‬‬
‫* ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺆﺩﻯ ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﻧﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺿﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺙ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-3 (2‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-10 (,‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻭ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-90‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-75‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Locator‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-13 (QUANTIZE‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Quantize‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“All‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-90‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪R-14 (NO‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-90‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻛﻤﻲ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻵﻥ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪R-14 (NO‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ )‪“(Quick Play‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-13 (QUANTIZE‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Quantize‬‬
‫‪AR-91‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-87‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ 01‬ﻭ ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪ ،16‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﻋﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫‪ ((S-1) PITCH BEND‬ﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ‪) “16‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪،(AR-68‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”‪) “OVDB‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ( ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ “RecType‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.(٥)-٦‬‬
‫• ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ”‪ “OVDB‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻝ ”‪ “RecType‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-89‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-17 (MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “DeleteBender‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Delete Bender‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “DeleteBender‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Locator‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-75‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ )‪“(Quick Play‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-17 (MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Delete Bender‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ ،“All‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-92‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺃﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٣‬‬
‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ ﻫﻲ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-17 (MENU‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “VelocityMod.‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Velocity Modify‬‬
‫‪Fix‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫‪Rate‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪Offset‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ ،*oFF‬ﻣﻦ ‪001‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻟﻠﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “oFF‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ *100%‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪200%‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “oFF‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫”‪ .“Fix‬ﺃﻧﻬﻢ ﻳﻐﻴﺮﻭﺍ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ‬
‫)ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –126‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ١‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬
‫*‬
‫‪ 000‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+126‬‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،١‬ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.١٢٧‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ( × )ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪(Rate‬‬
‫‪) +‬ﺿﺒﻂ ‪(Offset‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫‪Cursor‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪All‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪Locator‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ”‪ “Locator‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪R-17‬‬
‫)‪ ،(u, i‬ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-93‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .AR-93‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٤‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬
‫”‪ “GatetimeMod.‬ﺑﺪ ًﻻ ﻣﻦ ”‪.“VelocityMod.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺑﺪء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ“ ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ‬
‫‪ AR-82‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Beat‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Beat‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ ﻫﻲ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫‪Fix‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﻛﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ‪ ،*oFF .‬ﻣﻦ ‪00:00‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪99:95‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ‪ 99:95‬ﺗﻌﺒﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺭﺑﻊ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫‪ ٩٩‬ﺿﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪ ٩٥‬ﺗﻜﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “oFF‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Rate‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “oFF‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ‪ *100%‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ .“Fix‬ﺃﻧﻬﻢ ﻳﻐﻴﺮﻭﺍ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ ‪200%‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺿﻲ‬
‫)ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻹﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﺸﺮﻳﺔ( ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫‪Offset‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –9:95‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ 00:00‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫‪ *0:00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+9:95‬‬
‫)ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ( ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪،00:00‬‬
‫ﻭﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ 99:95‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪.99:95‬‬
‫)ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ( × )ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪) + (Rate‬ﺿﺒﻂ ‪(Offset‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-94‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-10 (DELETE‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-10 (DELETE‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-94‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-11 (INSERT‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-86‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-14 (STEP‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٢‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻻﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ‪ ١٦‬ﻭ ‪ ،١٧‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ‪ ١٦‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-11 (INSERT‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١٨‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-16 (ENTER‬ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ )ﻭﻣﻴﺾ(‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ )ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ(‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻭ‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﻩ )ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ(‪ .‬ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ( ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻺﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-96‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ L-15 (dFF‬ﻭ )‪ L-14 (sREW‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﺍﻫﺎ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ –ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-95‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ R-1 (5‬ﺇﻟﻰ )•( ‪ R-4‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ R-7 (6‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ R-10 (,‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﻃﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-89‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﺭﺑﻄﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺭﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺑﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻗﺒﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺭﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-11 (.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻀﻴﻒ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﻘﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺎﻓﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪62 2‬‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪A B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺇﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺍﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-5 (REST‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻹﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻡ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫‪62‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﻭ ‪ ٦‬ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﻳﺘﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﻭ ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٦‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪.R-17 (t, y‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-17 (MENU‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻧﻲ ﻭ ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ ﻫﻲ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪GateRate‬‬
‫)ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﻛﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻲ ﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ )ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ( ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ R-1 (5‬ﺇﻟﻰ )•( ‪ R-4‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ )‪ R-7 (6‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ .R-10 (,‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪ GateRate‬ﺑﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪ ٪٠٨٠‬ﻭﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺭﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ )‪ ٩٦‬ﺗﻜﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ GATE‬ﻝ‬
‫‪ ،٧٦٫٨ = ٠٫٨ × ٩٦) ٠٠:٧٦‬ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(٧٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 001%‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *080%‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪100%‬‬
‫‪Velocity‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ”‪ “KeyOn‬ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ،KeyOn‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *100‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪127‬‬
‫‪SysTrack‬‬
‫)ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪Chord ،*note‬‬
‫‪AR-96‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫‪R-15‬‬
‫‪R-13‬‬
‫‪R-14‬‬
‫‪R-16‬‬
‫‪C-7‬‬
‫‪C-4‬‬
‫‪L-9‬‬
‫‪R-17‬‬
‫‪L-13‬‬
‫‪C-17‬‬
‫‪C-10‬‬
‫‪L-14 L-16‬‬
‫‪L-15 L-17‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﻢ ﻛﺈﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ﺳﺖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺗﺴﻤﻰ‬
‫‪) INTRO‬ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪) NORMAL ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‪) NORMAL FILL-IN ،‬ﺍﻟﺤﺸﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‪) VARIATION ،‬ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ(‪) VARIATION FILL-IN ،‬ﺣﺸﻮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻼﻑ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪) ENDING‬ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء(‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﻨﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﻶﻟﺔ )ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪.(٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻲ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻫﻮ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫‪INTRO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪٥‬‬
‫‪NORMAL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪٥‬‬
‫‪NORMAL FILL-IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪٥‬‬
‫‪VARIATION‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪٥‬‬
‫‪VARIATION FILL-IN‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪٥‬‬
‫‪ENDING‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ‪ ،(S-1) PITCH BEND‬ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.S-2 (MODULATION‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻛﻘﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻋﺎﻣﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻳﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﺗﺪﻋﻰ ”ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﺁﻟﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﺑﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎً ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻣﺎﺯﺍﻟﺖ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎً ﻫﻲ ”‪.“Fix Data‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ”‪.“Fix Data‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-4‬‬
‫)‪ .(PATTERN SEQUENCER‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً )ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎً(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ‪ NORMAL‬ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻻﺣﻆ ”‪ “Fix Data‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻫﻮ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰء ﺑﺠﺰء‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺻﻠﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻲ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ )ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-97‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺣﺎﻻﺕ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎً‪:‬‬
‫‪Fix Data‬‬
‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬
‫‪Recorded Data‬‬
‫)ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ(‬
‫‪Empty‬‬
‫)ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺣﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﻤﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ(‪ .‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻬﻢ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺮﻗﻤﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ F:001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ F:100‬ﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻲ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-9‬‬
‫)‪ .([F] USER RHYTHMS‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-26‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-98‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺪﺧﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻟﺘﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺟﺰء ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ‬
‫ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎً ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ( ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﻴﺠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭﺣﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ )ﻣﺎﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ*( ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻋﺮﺽ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻛﺈﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ INTRO‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ENDING‬ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-99‬ﻭ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-102‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫■ ﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ‪ INTRO‬ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-4 (PATTERN SEQUENCER‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻛﺈﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-104‬‬
‫■ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﻋﺎﻡ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-97‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻘﺔ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺎﺑﻌﻲ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻛﺈﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-106‬‬
‫‪AR-99‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ L-13 (INTRO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪L-16‬‬
‫)‪ (SYNCHRO/ENDING‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ‪ ،INTRO‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-13 (INTRO‬‬
‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-14 (NORMAL/FILL-IN‬ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ NORMAL‬ﻭ ‪ ،NORMAL FILL-IN‬ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-15‬‬
‫)‪ (VARIATION/FILL-IN‬ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ‪ VARIATION‬ﻭ ‪VARIATION‬‬
‫‪.FILL-IN‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫‪INTRO‬‬
‫‪NORMAL‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪NORMAL FILL-IN‬‬
‫‪GF‬‬
‫‪VARIATION‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪VARIATION FILL-IN‬‬
‫‪HG‬‬
‫‪ENDING‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﻭ‬
‫ﻧﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺳﻤﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺁﻟﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﻤﻔﺮﺩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﻤﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬
‫‪PERC‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻮﻝ‬
‫‪DRUM‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫‪BASS‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ CHORD1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪CHORD5‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (MIXER‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Part‬‬
‫‪AR-100‬‬
‫• ﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ )ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪-‬ﺳﻮﻟﻮ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ‬
‫)‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺃﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪R-17‬‬
‫)‪.(u, i‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪:‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ”‪ “Part‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ ،“Sol‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺟﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻪ ﺑﻤﻔﺮﺩﻩ )ﺳﻮﻟﻮ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺎﻟﺞ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-102‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﻓﻌﻠﺖ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﺡ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-4 (PATTERN SEQUENCER‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-4‬‬
‫)‪ ،(PATTERN SEQUENCER‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ )‪(Rec Menu‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-6‬‬
‫)‪.(RECORD‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-6 (RECORD‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻧﻄﻔﺎء‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻤﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ“ ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺃﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪:Quantize‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺳﻮﺍء ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻓﻴﻪ ‪،4 ،*oFF‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪،16 ،8T ،8 (oFF‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫‪16T‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ‪.(oFF‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‪“4” .‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺑﻌﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ “T‬ﻳﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺜﻼﺛﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪:Precount‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺗﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “1‬ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪“2‬‬
‫ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻧﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “oFF‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪2 ،*1 ،oFF‬‬
‫‪:PlayChord‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﻭ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻫﻲ ”‪) “C‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‪C) “C7” ،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ”‪ C) "Cm‬ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ(‪ .‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫”‪ “oFF‬ﻳﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪،*C ،oFF‬‬
‫‪Cm ،C7‬‬
‫‪:Metronome‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )‪ (on‬ﺃﻭ ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻪ )‪(oFF‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪on ،*oFF‬‬
‫‪AR-101‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٦‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-99‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫)‪) “(Rec Menu‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-101‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-14 (NORMAL/FILL-IN‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-15‬‬
‫)‪ (VARIATION/FILL-IN‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (MIXER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﻢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫• ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ‪ INTRO‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ENDING‬ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ )‪ ،ENDING ،INTRO‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪(.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-104‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-106‬‬
‫‪ :TONE‬ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫*‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :Part‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﻳﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪ (on‬ﻭ‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )‪(oFF‬‬
‫‪on ،oFF‬‬
‫‪:Volume‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 000‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪127‬‬
‫‪ :Pan‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﻪ ﻣﻦ ‪ –64‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪00‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+63‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-97‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﻨﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺮﺍﻗﺐ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-102‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪:Reverb‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-33‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 000‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪127‬‬
‫‪:Chorus‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-33‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 000‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪127‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻱ ﻧﻔﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ )ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ K:129‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (K:147‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻭ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‪ .‬ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﻟﻠﺒﺎﺹ ﻭ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪٥‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-99‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺗﺤﺮﻙ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺗﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-7 (MIXER‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-15‬‬
‫)‪.(EXIT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ )ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ( ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ‪ ،(S-1) PITCH BEND‬ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ S-2 (MODULATION‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-10‬‬
‫)‪ .(DELETE‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﻴﻊ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-10 (DELETE‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (٤‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺐ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-6 (RECORD‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺬﻫﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﻄﻔﺎء‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫”‪.“Recorded Data‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-98‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎً ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪Fix Data‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪Recorded Data‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ )‪ (٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺿﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎً‬
‫ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Empty‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﻷﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-6 (RECORD‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-6 (RECORD‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﻄﻔﺎء(‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،C-6 (RECORD‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-110‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﻧﻮﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ )ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-108‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ )ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﻋﺪﺍ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ(‪ .‬ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ ‪.001:1‬‬
‫‪AR-103‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٧‬ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﻮﺻﻲ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬
‫ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺨﻠﻖ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-106‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-4 (EDIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٨‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﺭ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “ElementEdit‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“ElementEdit‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻛﺈﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺨﻠﻖ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-106‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-4 (PATTERN SEQUENCER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-99‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-115‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻪ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﻟﻦ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ )‪Rec‬‬
‫‪) “(Menu‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-101‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻻﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ :Measure‬ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪ :ENDING ،INTRO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫‪ :VARIATION ،NORMAL‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫‪،NORMAL FILL-IN‬‬
‫‪ :VARIATION FILL-IN‬ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪02‬‬
‫‪ :Beat‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 2/4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 4/4‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،8/4‬ﻭﻣﻦ ‪ 2/8‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16/8‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-97‬‬
‫‪AR-104‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ )ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ( ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ‪ ،(S-1) PITCH BEND‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪S-2‬‬
‫)‪ (MODULATION‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺣﻠﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﻧﻮﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-10‬‬
‫)‪ .(DELETE‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-10 (DELETE‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (٤‬ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻃﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﺐ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-6 (RECORD‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺬﻫﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﻄﻔﺎء‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫”‪.“Recorded Data‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﺎﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-102‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ‬
‫ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ )‪(S-1‬‬
‫‪ PITCH BEND‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻓﻜﺮﺓ ﺟﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻗﺒﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻌﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ )ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-111‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-6 (RECORD‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-6 (RECORD‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﻄﻔﺎء(‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،C-6 (RECORD‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪.L-17 (START/STOP‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ ،‬ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ 001:1‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-110‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﻀﻴﻒ ﻧﻮﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ )ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-108‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٩‬ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١١‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٢‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻛﺈﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺨﻠﻖ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-106‬‬
‫‪AR-105‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-4 (PATTERN SEQUENCER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺻﻮﻝ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٢‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺮﻭﻓﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-99‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-115‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫)‪) “(Rec Menu‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-101‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ L-13 (INTRO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪L-16‬‬
‫)‪ (SYNCHRO/ENDING‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻟﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ ‪ ١٠‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺟﺪﻳﺪ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-104‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٥‬ﻟﺘﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ● ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻝ”‪ ،“Store‬ﻋﻨﺪﺋﺬ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺿﺮﻭﺭﻳﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻛﺈﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺨﻠﻖ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ“ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺨﻠﻖ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﻴﻖ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪R-13 (FUNCTION‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-106‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-155‬‬
‫• ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻴﻪ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ )?‪ (Replace‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻡ ﻻ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬
‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-145‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺈﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫)ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺳﻬﻞ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ )ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﻟﺘﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‬
‫ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪.(NO‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-4 (PATTERN SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-4 (EDIT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-4 (PATTERN SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Clear‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻝ ”‪ ،“EasyEdit‬ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ‪ EASY EDIT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺧﻔﺎﻕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬
‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-145‬‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻴﻨﻴﻦ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ )ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻭﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪(١‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ )‪ L-13 (INTRO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪L-16‬‬
‫)‪ (SYNCHRO/ENDING‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-107‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﺭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-17‬‬
‫)‪ (START/STOP‬ﻭ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‪ .‬ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ]‪ [RHYTHM‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ‪ ،EASY EDIT‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻛﻤﺎ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ ،٢ ،١‬ﻭ ‪ ٣‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-26‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ‪ F:101‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٥‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-102‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺃﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻓﻢ )‪ (١‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺍﻳﻀﺎّ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪ (٢‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ‪ INTRO‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ENDING‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً ﻛﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺎً ﻻﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺜﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻓﻢ )‪ (١‬ﻟﻺﺩﺧﺎﻝ ‪ INTRO‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻧﻬﺎء ‪ ENDING‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٧‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٩‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺮﻏﻮﺏ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻫﻨﺎ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١٠‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻺﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻛﺈﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺨﻠﻖ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-106‬‬
‫‪AR-108‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ )ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ(‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻛﺎ ”ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ“‪ .‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻛﺎ ”ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ“ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻧﻐﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻟﻸﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬
‫• ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻻﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬
‫• ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ* ﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻢ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ )‪(View Select‬‬
‫• ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ )ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ(‬
‫* ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺁﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-98‬ﻫﻲ ”‪ “Recorded Data‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ .“Empty‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ”‪.“Fix Data‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ”‪ ،“Fix Data‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺴﺦ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺧﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-114‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻻﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎً‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫”‪) “Bend‬ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ( ﺃﻭ ”‪) “Mod‬ﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ( ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎً ﺑﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ”‪ “VALU‬ﻋﻨﺪ ‪ ‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ )‪ Bend‬ﺃﻭ ‪(Mod‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻗﺒﻞ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ( ﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ( ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ )‪(VALU‬‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻫﻮ ﺍﻻﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻤﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺨﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻜﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ”‪ “001:01:00‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻴﺖ( ﻟﻠﺤﺪﺙ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ‪” .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺔ“ ﻫﻲ ﻭﺣﺪﺓ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻗﺼﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ٩٦‬ﺗﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫)ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤/٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (٤/٨‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ٤٨‬ﺗﻜﺔ ﻟﻠﻀﺮﺑﺔ )ﺧﺎﺹ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٨/٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(٨/١٦‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ )ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ(‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺗﻤﺜﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺎً ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫● ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﻤﻴﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺎً ﺑﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ )ﻃﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ(‪  .‬ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻷﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭ ﻻﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C-‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ C0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪*G9‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 00:00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪99:95‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ –8192‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 0000‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪+8191‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 000‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪127‬‬
‫* ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “C-‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) C-1‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪.(C0‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )‪(VEL‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ )‪(NOTE‬‬
‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ )‪(GATE‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪AR-109‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬
‫”‪ “Recorded Data‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “Empty‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬
‫ﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﻸﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Recorded Data‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “Empty‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ "ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-102‬‬
‫– ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Recorded Data‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ “Empty‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺪﻭﺵ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-106‬‬
‫– ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Empty‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻭﻳﻦ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪” ،(AR-115‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺁﻟﺔ ﻣﺎ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-113‬ﺃﻭ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-115‬‬
‫– ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Recorded Data‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺪﺭﺝ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ‬
‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-114‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-4 (EDIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “EventEdit‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-109‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪﺃ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪:٢‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-87‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-87‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-88‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺪﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-88‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻣﺎ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-89‬‬
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-89‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺮﺩ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-90‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-91‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺪﻯ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺏ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﻲ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻣﺪﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ“‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-91‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫”ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-92‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ“‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-95‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺍﻟﺸﺪﺓ(‬
‫ﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻣﺎ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-93‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ( ﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻩ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺍﺑﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-94‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻷﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ‬
‫)‪“(View Select‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-87‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ”‪ “SysTrack‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻴﺲ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪ ،PitchBend ،Note :‬ﻭ‬
‫‪.Modulation‬‬
‫‪AR-110‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ )ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء(‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-112‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻓﻘﻂ ﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﺗﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻘﻬﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺈﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ”‪) “PartPara‬ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء( ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ :‬ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-98‬‬
‫ﻫﻲ ”‪ “Recorded Data‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ .“Empty‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺘﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ”‪.“Fix Data‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Recorded Data‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫”‪ “Empty‬ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻟﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-4 (EDIT‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “PartPara‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪ :Table‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪١٩‬‬
‫‪ :BreakPoint‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ C‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪B‬‬
‫‪ :Invert‬ﺍﻷﻧﻘﻼﺏ‬
‫‪7th ،on ،oFF‬‬
‫‪ :Retrigger‬ﻣﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻹﻧﻄﻼﻕ‬
‫‪on ،oFF‬‬
‫‪ :BendRange‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪١٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪“Part Para‬‬
‫‪AR-111‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫■ ‪) Table‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺟﺬﺭ ‪ ،C‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(*‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻏﻴﺮ ‪ C‬ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻨﺠﺰ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ”ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ“ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ ‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﺬﺭ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻣﺎﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺪﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﻼﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺃﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ”‪ ،“PlayChord‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ )‪) “(Rec Menu‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-101‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ١٩‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺪﻭﺍﻝ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺘﻼﻑ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ‪ .٠١‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ‪ .٠٣‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪01‬‬
‫‪Bass Basic‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪02‬‬
‫‪Bass f-root‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪03‬‬
‫‪Bass 7th‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪04‬‬
‫‪Bass 7th f-root‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪05‬‬
‫‪Chord Basic‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪06‬‬
‫‪Chord Var2‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪07‬‬
‫‪Chord Var3‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪08‬‬
‫‪Chord Var4‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪09‬‬
‫‪Chord 7th‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪10‬‬
‫‪Chord Minor‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪11‬‬
‫‪Phrase‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪12‬‬
‫‪Chord Minor‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪13‬‬
‫‪Chord Minor f-root‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪14‬‬
‫‪Penta Phrase‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪15‬‬
‫‪Intro n-minor‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪16‬‬
‫‪Intro m-minor‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪17‬‬
‫‪Intro h-minor‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪18‬‬
‫‪Intro no Change‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪19‬‬
‫‪Intro dorian‬‬
‫*‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺗﺮ ﺳﺎﺑﻊ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻣﺴﺔ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ‪ ،C7‬ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻓﺄﻥ ‪ G‬ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ‪.Bb‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ‪.(Chord Basic) ٠٥‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻠﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻟﻠﺮﻗﻢ ‪ .١٢‬ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻰ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻤﺎﺳﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻠﻮﺩﻱ )ﺗﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ(‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻤﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺏ ‪VARIATION FILL-IN ،VARIATION ،NORMAL FILL-IN ،NORMAL‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺧﺎﺹ ﺏ ‪ INTRO‬ﻭ ‪ENDING‬‬
‫‪AR-112‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫■ ‪) BreakPoint‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ(‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪ C‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،B‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻫﺎ ﻧﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ‪ F‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﻊ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪ C‬ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﺎ‬
‫)‪ C3E3G3 (CEG‬ﻟﻴﺼﺒﺢ ‪) D3F#3A3‬ﻳﺮﺗﻔﻊ ‪ DF#A‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ‪ D‬ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪) E3G#3B3 ،‬ﺗﺮﺗﻔﻊ ‪ EG#B‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﻢ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ‪ E‬ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭ ‪) F2A2C3‬ﻳﺴﻘﻂ ‪ FAC‬ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺟﻮﺍﺏ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ‪ F‬ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫■ ‪) Invert‬ﺍﻷﻧﻘﻼﺏ(‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ‬
‫ﺃﺷﻜﺎﻝ ﺃﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺁﺓ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﺃﻡ ﻻ )‪ EGC‬ﻭ ‪ GCE‬ﻝ ‪.(CEG‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﻋﻨﺎ ﻧﻘﻮﻝ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ‪ C‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ ﻫﻮ ‪ CEG‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪ F‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ”‪ “oFF‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪،‬‬
‫ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .FAC‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ”‪) “on‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ (“7th‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،CFA‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﻘﻠﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .CEG‬ﺃﻥ ﺃﻧﺘﻘﺎﻝ ﻧﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ”‪) “on‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ (“7th‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “7th‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ”‪ “on‬ﻓﻘﻂ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ”‪ “C7‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫”‪ “PlayChord‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”)‪“09 (Chord 7th‬‬
‫ﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫* ”‪ “PlayChord‬ﻫﻲ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ )‪) “(Rec Menu‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-101‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ﻣﻦ ‪L-13‬‬
‫)‪ (INTRO‬ﺇﻟﻰ )‪ L-16 (SYNCHRO/ENDING‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭﻩ ﻫﻨﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ INTRO‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،ENDING‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫”‪ “Recorded Data‬ﺃﻭ ”‪.(“Empty‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-4 (EDIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “PartEdit‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Part Edit‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻝ ”‪ ،“Clear‬ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Clear Part‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪) “on‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ (“7th‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ”‪ “C‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫"‪) “BreakPoint‬ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ(‪.‬‬
‫■ ‪) Retrigger‬ﻣﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﻄﻼﻕ(‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﺄﺛﺮ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻘﻊ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎً ﺧﻼﻝ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﻣﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “on‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ”ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﻧﻄﻼﻕ“ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎً‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪“oFF‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺘﺴﺒﺒﺎً ﻓﻲ ﻗﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺣﺪﻳﺜﺎً‪.‬‬
‫■ ‪) BendRange‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﻨﺎء(‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻓﻲ ﺧﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﻧﺼﻒ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Empty‬‬
‫‪AR-113‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺴﺦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ‪ INTRO‬ﺃﻭ ‪ENDING‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً ﻛﻨﻤﻂ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍً ﻛﻨﺴﺨﺔ ﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﺍﻭ ﺟﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪ (٥‬ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺍً ﻛﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ )ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪ (٥‬ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻣﺴﻤﻮﺡ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-14‬‬
‫)‪ (NORMAL/FILL-IN‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-15‬‬
‫)‪ (VARIATION/FILL-IN‬ﻟﻺﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ‬
‫)‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-4 (EDIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “PartEdit‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ /‬ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻫﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Part Edit‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Copy‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Part Copy‬‬
‫‪1‬‬
‫‪3‬‬
‫‪AR-114‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻛﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y, u, i‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪R-14 (–, +‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪2‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ A:001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪F:100‬‬
‫‪‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻟﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫‪،(NORMAL) normal‬‬
‫‪،(NORMAL FILL-IN) nrmFil‬‬
‫‪،(VARIATION) Variat‬‬
‫‪(VARIATION FILL-IN) VarFil‬‬
‫‪‬ﺟﺰء ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‬
‫‪) Percus‬ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ(‪) Drum ،‬ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻠﺔ(‪Bass ،‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺒﺎﺹ(‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪ Chord1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) Chord5‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪(٥‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻠﻨﺴﺦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺦ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺴﻮﺥ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ”‪.“Recorded Data‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “ElementEdit‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“ElementEdit‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-4 (EDIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “ElementEdit‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ :‬ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ :Measure‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫‪:ENDING ،INTRO‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫‪:VARIATION ،NORMAL‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪16‬‬
‫‪VARIATION ،NORMAL FILL-IN‬‬
‫‪FILL-IN‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪02‬‬
‫‪ :Beat‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٤/٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤/٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،٤/٨‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٨/٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٨/١٦‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“ElementEdit‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻝ ”‪ ،“Clear‬ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Clear Element‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-15‬‬
‫)‪ (EXIT‬ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Empty‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﻧﻤﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-4 (EDIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “AllEdit‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“All Edit‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻝ ”‪ ،“Clear‬ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻳﻐﻴﺮ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Empty‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﻟﻨﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻫﻲ ”‪.“Empty‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﻭ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-4 (EDIT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-115‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﻢ ﻛﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻔﺮﺩ ﻫﻮ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪١٣‬‬
‫ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺧﻤﺲ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SDHC‬ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-131‬‬
‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻭﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺰﺍﻣﻦ‪ .‬ﻭﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ *.‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺳﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺧﺎﺹ )ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-141‬‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺧﺎﺹ )ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ﻟﻠﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺎً ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫”ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-141‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻴﺒﻨﺔ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﻤﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺠﻞ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﺩﺍء ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺇﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻣﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ )‪ T-8 (MIC IN‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪T-5‬‬
‫)‪ (INST IN‬ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺎﺩ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻭ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﻠﻲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-31‬‬
‫• ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ )‪ T-6 (AUDIO IN‬ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-116‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺃﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﻴﻴﺪﺍﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻤﻜﻨﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-98‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-45‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-35‬‬
‫• ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-53‬‬
‫• ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-63‬‬
‫• ﺣﻔﻆ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-61‬‬
‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-132‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻭﻧﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻴﺔ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻭ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ \ﺍﻥ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ً ،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮﺓ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺤﺠﺰ ﻓﺮﺍﻍ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺘﺰﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪٦٤٠‬‬
‫ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً‪ .‬ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﺰﺍﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭ ﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻓﻌﻠﻴﺎً ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪ :‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ < ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-5‬‬
‫)‪(SONG SEQUENCER‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪R-17 (t, y‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪R-17 (t, y‬‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪C-9 (CARD‬‬
‫• ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻟﻜﻦ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﻭ )‪ C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩﻙ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-120‬‬
‫‪AR-117‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪R-15‬‬
‫‪R-13‬‬
‫‪R-14‬‬
‫‪R-16‬‬
‫‪C-9‬‬
‫‪C-5‬‬
‫‪C-3‬‬
‫‪C-2‬‬
‫‪R-17‬‬
‫‪L-13‬‬
‫‪L-14 L-16 L-18‬‬
‫‪L-15 L-17‬‬
‫‪C-17‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍً ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-116‬ﺣﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻻﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺞ ‪CD‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻛﻤﺼﺪﺭ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻛﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻬﻢ ﺑﺒﻌﻀﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-12‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-132‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻠﻪ ﺳﺎﺑﻘﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﻭ ‪ ،٥‬ﻭﺑﺒﺴﺎﻃﺔ ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ )‪ .(T-1‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-132‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍً ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-118‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﻄﻂ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-3 (AUDIO RECORD‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ >‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-3 (AUDIO RECORD‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ“ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺃﻭ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-120‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ(‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫• ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪:‬ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻘﻀﻲ ﻣﻨﺬ ﺑﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺭﻏﺒﺖ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺎً ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﻳﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻥ ﻳﻜﺘﺐ ﻓﻮﻗﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-118‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻪ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ،٥‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺮﻙ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎً‪ ،‬ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٥‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “Measure Beat‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (t‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ )‪(٢‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻻﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [( ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Recording Time‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-3 (AUDIO RECORD‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﻻﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺠﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫)*( ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-3 (AUDIO RECORD‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﻭﻣﻴﺾ )ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ .R-14 (NO‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ .R-14 (YES‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-3 (AUDIO RECORD‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪C-3 (AUDIO RECORD‬‬
‫ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﻧﻄﻔﺎء ﻭ ﻳﻨﺘﻬﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ > ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻟﻴﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (PLAY/STOP‬ﻫﻨﺎ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﻳﺒﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺃﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-121‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-2‬‬
‫)‪.(AUDIO PLAY‬‬
‫• ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺃﻭ ﻋﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ(‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-119‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍً ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-118‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-49‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٦‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-118‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٥‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٧‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-49‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-3 (AUDIO RECORD‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻟﺘﺼﺒﺢ ﺟﺎﻫﺰﺍً ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-118‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٣‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-74‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻀﺮ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٦‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-118‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-3 (AUDIO RECORD‬‬
‫‪AR-120‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻟﻠﺘﺠﻮﺍﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻷﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﻭﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪(:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪C-9 (CARD‬‬
‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪ C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ <‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ )ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ <(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-5‬‬
‫)‪ (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ < ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‬
‫‪.:‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪ C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ < ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻭﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ .:‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻻﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫• ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ‪UPPER 1،‬‬
‫‪ ،UPPER 2‬ﻭ ‪ LOWER‬ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-14‬ﻭ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-15‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺧﺘﺰﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﺤﺪ ﺃﻗﺼﻰ ﺃﺛﻨﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻣﻊ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻤﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ *.‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫* ﺳﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺧﺎﺹ )ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-141‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ(‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻧﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*( ﻓﻲ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫)ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ L-15 (dFF‬ﻭ ‪L-14‬‬
‫)‪ (sREW‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ*‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-18 (PART SELECT‬‬
‫* ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-122‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-2 (AUDIO PLAY‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ > ﻭﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮ )‪ :‬ﺃﻭ <( ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،L-17 (PLAY/STOP‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-121‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫■ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-17‬‬
‫)‪ (PLAY/STOP‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺎﻋﺪﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ )ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻳﻘﻊ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﺘﺮﻳﻮ( ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻥ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﺠﺎﺡ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻫﻮ ﻓﻲ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﺿﻐﻄﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-18 (PART SELECT‬ﺗﺒﺪﻝ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ(‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﺑﻔﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺎً ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-15 (dFF‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ*‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-14 (sREW‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ*‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-16 (PAUSE‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﺪء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-16 (PAUSE‬‬
‫ﺧﻔﺾ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )–( ‪ .R-14‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﻔﺾ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ .R-14 (+‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺮﻓﻊ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-18 (PART SELECT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬
‫* ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺎً ﻓﻘﻂ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-17‬‬
‫)‪.(PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-2‬‬
‫)‪.(AUDIO PLAY‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺃﻭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ( ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫• ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-2 (AUDIO PLAY‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-122‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ‪) MIC/INST‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-42‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪ “Pan‬ﻫﻮ ”‪“0‬‬
‫)ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ )‪ T-8 (MIC IN‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ )‪.T-5 (INST IN‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻊ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ ٤‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-121‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-13 (REPEAT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﻭ ﻭﻣﻴﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ?‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-13 (REPEAT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﻓﻮﺭﺍً ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻔﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻭ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬
‫ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻫﺎ )ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ( ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ً‬
‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-2 (AUDIO PLAY‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-17 (MENU‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﻝ ”‪ ،“Rename‬ﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Rename‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻟﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-155‬‬
‫• ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ? ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻬﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪٤‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-121‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-15 (EXIT‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ R-14‬ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﻦ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻠﻐﻲ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ًﻻ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-17‬‬
‫)‪ (PLAY/STOP‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻓﻪ‪ .‬ﺛﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-13‬‬
‫)‪.(REPEAT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ? ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-123‬‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-2 (AUDIO PLAY‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺤﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻥ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ 001‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 005‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻧﻔﺴﻪ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺻﻮﺗﻲ ﻣﺮﻗﻢ ﻣﻦ ‪ 006‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ )ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ‬
‫ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ* ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ( ﺳﻮﻑ‬
‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ‪.‬‬
‫* ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-141‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-17 (MENU‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪) “Clear‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫”‪ (“Delete‬ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪R-14 (NO‬‬
‫ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-124‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪R-15‬‬
‫‪R-13‬‬
‫‪R-14‬‬
‫‪R-16‬‬
‫‪R-17‬‬
‫‪R-18‬‬
‫‪C-17‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻞ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻟﻠﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻭﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺩﺭ ﻧﺴﺒﻴﺎً ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ )ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-126‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻦ ”‪ “Performance‬ﻭﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻫﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻛﻞ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-13 (FUNCTION‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪Performance‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y, u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٤‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ”‪) “Tune‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻗﻮﺍﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻴﻜﺔ )] [(‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻳﻌﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﻴﻤﺘﻪ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻻﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-121‬‬
‫‪AR-125‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-15 (EXIT‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺃﻭ ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎً ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”‪) AutoResume‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-129‬ﻭ ”‪) Default‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-129‬‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-61‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻨﻰ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ‬
‫ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻳﺸﺎﺭ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺠﻤﻴﺔ )*(‪.‬‬
‫‪) Touch‬ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : oFF‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺑﻐﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : *1‬ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫‪ : 2‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻗﻮﻱ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻔﻴﻒ‬
‫‪) TchOffVel‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪000 - 100* - 127‬‬
‫‪) Ped.Assign‬ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺼﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪T-3‬‬
‫)‪.(SUSTAIN/ASSIGNABLE JACK‬‬
‫‪ : *SUS‬ﺑﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‬
‫‪ : SSt‬ﺑﺪﺍﻝ ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻴﻨﻮﺗﻮ‬
‫‪ : SFt‬ﺑﺪﺍﻝ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‬
‫‪ : rHy‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء‪/‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪) Tune‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ(‬
‫ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻘﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٠,١‬ﻫﺮﺗﺰ‪.‬‬
‫‪A4=415.5 - 440.0* - 465.9Hz‬‬
‫‪) BendRange‬ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﻨﺎء(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺠﻠﺔ )‪(S-1‬‬
‫‪.PITCH BEND‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ 00‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ *02‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 24‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫• ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻻﺗﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-121‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪) Performance‬ﺍﻷﺩﺍء‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ(‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-13‬‬
‫)‪ (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫‪) ArpegHold‬ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-21‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : *oFF‬ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪ : on‬ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “on‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-18‬‬
‫)‪ (AUTO HARMONIZE/ARPEGGIATOR‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“oFF‬‬
‫‪AR-126‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪) ArpegSpeed‬ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺪﺭﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺃﻭﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺿﻤﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻤﻘﻄﻮﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺰﻭﻓﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-21‬‬
‫‪8 ،6 ،4S ،*4 ،3 ،2S ،2 ،1‬‬
‫ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺑﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺕ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬
‫”‪ ،“4‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ‪.7777‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺸﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ”‪ “S‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﺧﻠﻴﻂ ﻣﺎ‪ 2 6 2S .‬ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ﻭ‬
‫‪ 4S‬ﻳﻌﺰﻑ ‪.6767‬‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪) Play/CardUtl‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻔﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ(‬
‫• ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-132‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫• ﺃﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﻠﺖ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻖ“ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪) ArpegPart‬ﺟﺰء ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ‪UPPER‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ LOWER‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-21‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻣﺠﺰﺃﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺘﻴﻦ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-15‬‬
‫‪ : *Upp‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪UPPER‬‬
‫‪ : Low‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪LOWER‬‬
‫‪) PreCount‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻪ )‪ (on‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-132‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻻ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻪ‬
‫)‪.(*oFF‬‬
‫‪) SongRepeat‬ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ(‬
‫‪) RegFltAcmp‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻋﻴﺔ )‪ (*oFF‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-61‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻋﻴﺔ )‪.(on‬‬
‫‪) RegFltScal‬ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻋﻴﺔ )‪ (oFF‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-61‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺴﺘﺪﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫)‪.(*on‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ )‪ (on‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-132‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻻ ﻳﺘﻜﺮﺭ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‬
‫)‪.(*oFF‬‬
‫‪) AllData‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-134‬ﻭ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-135‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ) CardFormat‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-132‬‬
‫‪ ) FileDelete‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-136‬‬
‫‪ ) FileRename‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-136‬‬
‫‪AR-127‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪) Volume‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪MIDI‬‬
‫‪) KeyboardCh‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ(‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ”ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻨﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-38‬‬
‫‪) AccompVol.‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪A09‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ .(A16‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻻﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ A01‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪.(A03‬‬
‫‪000 - 115* - 127‬‬
‫‪) SongVol.‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-132‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻻﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ A01‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ (A03‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ )ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ A09‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫‪.(A16‬‬
‫*‪000 - 127‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ(‪.‬‬
‫‪01* - 16‬‬
‫‪) LocalCtrl‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ )‪(*on‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻭ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻧﻮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺼﻠﻴﻦ‬
‫)‪.(oFF‬‬
‫‪) AccompOut‬ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )‪ (on‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﺮﺳﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺟﻲ )‪.(*oFF‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪) General‬ﺃﺧﺮﻱ(‬
‫‪) MetroVol.‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ(‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺮﺗﺒﻂ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪A08‬‬
‫) ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء( ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻄﻪ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-38‬‬
‫‪000 - 100* - 127‬‬
‫‪) AudioVol.‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ(‬
‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-116‬‬
‫*‪000 - 127‬‬
‫‪) Speaker‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ”*‪ “on‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ‬
‫”‪ “oFF‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ ﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺟﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ )‪ T-4 (PHONES‬ﻭ ‪T-9‬‬
‫)‪ (LINE OUT‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “oFF‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮﻱ ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺍً ﻝ ‪ SPEAKER OFF‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪“oFF‬‬
‫ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Contrast‬ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ‪(LCD‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪01 - 09* - 17‬‬
‫‪AR-128‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫‪) AutoPower‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-13‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ )‪ (*on‬ﺃﻭ ﻣﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ )‪ .(oFF‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ”‪ “on‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺒﻄﻞ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﺑﺎﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-4‬‬
‫)‪ ([A] POPS/ROCK/DANCE‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-1‬‬
‫)‪ (POWER‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪) AutoResume‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﺎ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : *oFF‬ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪ : on‬ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺗﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-158‬‬
‫• ﻣﺒﺪﺋﻴﺎً‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻼﺋﻢ ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﺟﺎﺗﻚ‪.‬‬
‫‪) Default‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ )ﻣﺴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (i, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “General‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “Default‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻫﻨﺎ‪:‬‬
‫ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ )ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪Clear‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻛﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ(‪.‬‬
‫‪Store‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-158‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Complete‬ﻭﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-16 (ENTER‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-13 (FUNCTION‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “oFF‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ”‪) “AutoResume‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-129‬‬
‫‪) Initialize‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺪ ﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫”‪ “Parameter‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٤‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-158‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-129‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﻮﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ )ﺃﻭ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (i, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “General‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (i, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “Initialize‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ”‪) “All‬ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ( ﺃﻭ ”‪ ) “Parameter‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪AR-130‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪R-16‬‬
‫‪R-13‬‬
‫‪R-14‬‬
‫‪C-9‬‬
‫‪R-17‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎّ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻰ )ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ (MIDI‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪ SDHC :‬ﺃﻭ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ ﻛﺮﺭﻭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﻹﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺤﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-133‬ﻭ ”ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-135‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-134‬‬
‫ﻭ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-135‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-137‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ )ﺃﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪ SMF 0‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪(MID) MIDI‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺡ )ﺃﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ(‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-98‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ )‪(AC7‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-44‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ )‪(TN7‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-35‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ )‪(DS7‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ )‪(MPS‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-53‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ SMF‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ )ﻣﺜﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪SD‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-142‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻭﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-63‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ )‪(*MID ،CMS‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-61‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫)‪(RM7‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-25‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪(SCD‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ )‪(AL7‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫•‬
‫* ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺍﻹﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﻪ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺽ )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻗﺼﺪ(‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻵﻛﻠﺔ‪.‬‬
‫– ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﻳﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻪ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﻔﻆ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﺃﻳﻀﺎّ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻥ ﺗﺨﻔﻖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻀﻐﻂ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-1 (POWER‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻗﻨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-145‬‬
‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺠﺰ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-131‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫• ﺃﻥ ﺷﺤﻨﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻛﻨﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﺷﻘﺐ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺣﺪﺙ ﻫﺬﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﺩﺍﻓﻲء ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲءﺑﻌﺪ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻭﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-7‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺸﻘﺐ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻠﻒ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺸﻘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻮﺍﺟﻬﺎً ﻷﻋﻠﻰ )ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺗﻬﺎ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻟﻪ ﺑﺤﺬﺭ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )‪ (T-1‬ﺣﺘﻰ‬
‫ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻃﻘﻄﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻭﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ;‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “No Card‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-137‬‬
‫• ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺧﺘﻔﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ; ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪.:‬‬
‫ﻟﻨﺰﻉ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﺿﻐﻄﻪ ﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻘﺐ ﺍﻛﺜﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻖ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﺎً ﻟﻠﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ .‬ﺃﺟﺬﺏ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﺸﻘﺐ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺨﺰﻧﺔ‬
‫ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻰ ﺗﺠﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻫﻲ‬
‫”ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺳﺮﻳﻊ“‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﻤﺎﻣﺎً ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻟﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻟﻴﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ”‪.“Play/CardUtl‬‬
‫‪AR-132‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪.“CardFormat‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻛﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ )ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-9 ([F] USER RHYTHMS‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-12 ([L] USER TONES‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ DSP‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪” ٤‬ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪“DSP‬‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-34‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.(٢٠٠‬‬
‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-7‬‬
‫)‪ ،([D] ARABIC/ORIENTAL‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪ L-8 ([E] PIANO RHYTHMS‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-9 ([F] USER RHYTHMS‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪C-5 (SONG SEQUENCER‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻨﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-10 (BANK‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺑﻨﻚ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-13‬‬
‫)‪ ،(FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-8 (SCALE‬ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ”?‪.“Sure‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬
‫)‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ”‪ “Complete‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺄﺧﺬ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻃﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﺒﻀﻌﺔ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻜﺘﻤﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-9‬‬
‫)‪ (CARD‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-9 (LOAD/SAVE‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪ ١*“Xxxx Load‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-133‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.١*“Xxxx Save‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪ ،SMF‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-17‬‬
‫)‪ (y‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻫﻨﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“Seq SmfSave‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺎﺕ ”‪ ،“Xxxx Load‬ﻭ ”‪ ،“Seq Save‬ﻭ ”‪Seq‬‬
‫‪ “SmfSave‬ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪.R-17 (t, y‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﻌﻴﻴﻨﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ”‪ ٢*“USERNAME.xxx‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬
‫ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺎً ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (١‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪ (٢‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪9‬‬
‫‪J‬‬
‫‪T‬‬
‫'‬
‫‪8‬‬
‫‪I‬‬
‫‪S‬‬
‫_‬
‫`‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪H‬‬
‫‪R‬‬
‫&‬
‫~‬
‫‪5 6‬‬
‫‪F G‬‬
‫‪P Q‬‬
‫‪Z S‬‬
‫@ }‬
‫‪4‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪Y‬‬
‫{‬
‫‪1 2 3‬‬
‫‪B C D‬‬
‫‪L M N‬‬
‫‪V W X‬‬
‫^ ‪) -‬‬
‫‪0‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪U‬‬
‫(‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻞ ﺷﻲء ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ”‪ “Xxxx‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ”‪ “xxx‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻫﻮ ﺃﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﻷﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-134‬‬
‫• ﺃﻥ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺫﻭ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ SMF‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺨﺰﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﻴﺌﺔ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪ ١٦) SMF 0‬ﻗﻨﺎﺓ(‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ ‪ A01‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ A16‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪SMF‬‬
‫‪ 01CH‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،16CH‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺗﺒﺎﻋﺎً‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ SMF 01CH‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .16CH‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺗﻌﻄﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ .16‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ 01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 16‬ﻭ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “On‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫”‪ “Part On/Off‬ﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﻣﺎ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻣﻦ ‪ A01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ (A16‬ﻟﻨﻔﺲ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻗﻢ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻈﻪ‪ .‬ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‪ ،‬ﺃﺣﺪﺍﺙ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻟﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻻﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ”‪.“Play/CardUtl‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “AllData‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪ ،“All Load‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪R-17 (y‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“All Save‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٦‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-133‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫■ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﻳﺴﻤﻰ‬
‫‪ MUSICDAT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ MUSICDAT‬ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-132‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ MUSICDAT‬ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪،‬‬
‫ﺣﺬﻓﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻞ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻱ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪.MUSICDAT‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫* ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ”‪ “Xxxx‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪MUSICDAT‬‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ”‪.“Play/CardUtl‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “AllData‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪.“All Load‬‬
‫• ﺑﺎﻗﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-135‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪C-9‬‬
‫)‪ (CARD‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٣‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-133‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﻙ ﻛﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻭﺣﺪﺍﺕ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ )ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-9 (LOAD/SAVE‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ”‪ *“Xxxx Load‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ .‬ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-135‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ ،R-13 (FUNCTION‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.C-17 (MENU‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ”‪.“Play/CardUtl‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “FileDelete‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ”‪.“Play/CardUtl‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻟﻠﺤﺬﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪“Please Wait‬‬
‫)ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ(‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Complete‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-136‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (i, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫”‪ “FileRename‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﺎ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (u, i‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺣﺮﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺒﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-16‬‬
‫)‪.(ENTER‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﻠﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”?‪ “Sure‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪R-14‬‬
‫)‪ (YES‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (NO‬ﻟﻺﻟﻐﺎء‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-14 (YES‬ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪“Please Wait‬‬
‫)ﻣﺸﻴﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ(‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺟﺮﺍء ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Complete‬ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻛﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪R-16‬‬
‫‪R-14‬‬
‫‪C-9‬‬
‫‪L-9‬‬
‫‪L-8‬‬
‫‪R-17‬‬
‫‪L-13‬‬
‫‪L-14 L-16 L-18‬‬
‫‪L-15 L-17‬‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪ 0 SMF‬ﺃﻭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪MIDI‬‬
‫)‪.(MID‬‬
‫• ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻴﺔ )‪ ،MP3 ،WAV‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ (.‬ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-18‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 00‬ﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-128‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“on‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫• ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-15‬‬
‫)‪ .(dFF‬ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-15 (dFF‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪ .‬ﺃﻥ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﻤﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-14‬‬
‫)‪ .(sREW‬ﻳﺼﻤﺖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻔﻠﻰ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-14‬‬
‫)‪ (sREW‬ﻣﻀﻐﻮﻃﺎً‪ .‬ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺭﻗﻤﻪ ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺎً‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-16 (PAUSE‬ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-132‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻨﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻠﻪ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ MUSICDAT‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻘﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.١‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﻤﻰ ‪ MUSICDAT‬ﺃﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺬﺭﻱ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻮﻳﻪ ”ﻫﺎﻡ!“ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ C-9 (CARD‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫‪AR-137‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻘﻄﻌﺔ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﻮ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﻭ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻵﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺇﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-18 (PART SELECT‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ”‪ “Part Select‬ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻊ‬
‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﻣﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪.“Part L‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫”‪) “Part L‬ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ( ﻭ ”‪) “Part R‬ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‬
‫ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ R-17 (y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺇﻟﻰ”‪“SelectCh‬‬
‫ﻭﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.R-16 (ENTER‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-17 (t, y‬ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ 0‬ﺑﻴﻦ‬
‫”‪) “Part L‬ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ( ﻭ ”‪) “Part R‬ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ(‪،‬‬
‫ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﻭﺍﻷﺯﺭﺍﺭ )‪ R-14 (–, +‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪ MIDI‬ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-138‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-18 (PART SELECT‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‪.‬‬
‫‪.٧‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٨‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫• ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﻳﺮﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ )ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ( ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ ،UPPER 1‬ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ ،UPPER 2‬ﻭﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪.LOWER‬‬
‫• ﺣﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ /‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻗﺴﻢ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻭ ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ‪ MIDI‬ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (PLAY/STOP‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-13 (REPEAT‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻫﻲ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺠﺮﻯ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء ﻟﻠﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-15‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﺴﻬﻮﻟﺔ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ (UPPER 1‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻴﺪﻭﻱ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ? ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ? ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﻣﻴﺾ ﻭﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٣‬ﻭ ‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻦ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ‬
‫‪ ٣‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪.٤‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﻓﺄﻥ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺼﺒﺢ ﻫﻮ ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻛﺠﺰء ﻟﻠﻴﺪ –ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ ﺃﻭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ ﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء(“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-138‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻟﻜﻼ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-8‬‬
‫)‪ ،([E] PIANO RHYTHMS‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪L-9‬‬
‫)‪.([F] USER RHYTHMS‬‬
‫• ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻴﻦ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻠﻪ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪.UPPER 1‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻛﻼ ﺍﻟﺠﺰﺋﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ –ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺎً ﻟﻠﺠﺰء ‪.UPPER 1‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻳﺪﻩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪﻩ‬
‫ﻛﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﻧﻬﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-13 (REPEAT‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪.L-17 (PLAY/STOP‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (PLAY/STOP‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻌﻴﺪ ﺑﺪء‬
‫ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ﻧﻔﺲ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-19‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺗﺒﻌﺎً ﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”‪) SongVol.‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-128‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-125‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”‪) PreCount‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-127‬ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-125‬‬
‫‪AR-139‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻭﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻬﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻳﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ MIDI‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺎً ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫)ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪(A-B‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺃﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ .MIDI‬ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻳﺬﻋﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫‪ SP2) Windows® XP‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ( *‪١‬‬
‫®‪٢* Windows Vista‬‬
‫®‪٣* Windows 7‬‬
‫‪ ،10.4.11 ،10.3.9) Mac OS® X‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‪ 10.5.8 ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ‪10.6.3 ،‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ(‬
‫*‪ Windows XP :١‬ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﻣﻨﺰﻟﻲ‬
‫‪ Windows XP‬ﺇﺣﺘﺮﺍﻓﻲ )‪ -٣٢‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‬
‫*‪ -٣٢) Windows Vista :٢‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‬
‫*‪ -٣٢) Windows 7 :٣‬ﺑﻴﺖ‪ -٦٤ ،‬ﺑﻴﺖ(‬
‫• ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ‪B‬‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪ USB‬ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻵﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ‪.MIDI‬‬
‫‪) : CASIO USB-MIDI‬ﺧﺎﺹ ‪،Windows Vista ،Windows 7‬‬
‫‪(Mac OS X‬‬
‫”ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ ‪ “USB‬ﺃﻭ ”‪ USB‬ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ“ ‪) :‬ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﺏ ‪(Windows XP‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ ،MIDI‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻻﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪ .‬ﺍﻥ ﻓﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﻛﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﻳﺠﻌﻞ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺴﺘﺤﻴ ً‬
‫ﻼ‪.‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺑﺪﺍ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫• ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﻭ ًﻻ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ‬
‫ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫• ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻵﻥ!‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫‪AR-140‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺃﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﻹﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺘﻪ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻨﺠﺎﺡ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺮﻙ‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ‪ MIDI‬ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪MIDI‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ”ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ‪ “MIDI‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬
‫”ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-126‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-38‬ﻭ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ ‪ MIDI IN‬ﻭ ‪ ، MIDI OUT‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ‪MIDI‬‬
‫ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-157‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ )‪.General MIDI Level 1 (GM‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺗﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ MIDI‬ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺪﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ URL‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://world.casio.com/‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪ CASIO‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻋﻈﻴﻢ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟﺪﻳﻚ‪ .‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎً ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻤﻠﺔ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻭ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-131‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ‪ CASIO WORLDWIDE‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪URL‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪http://world.casio.com/‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺠﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻘﻄﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺑﺤﺚ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻟﻤﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻟﻴﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﺩﻧﻰ ﻟﻠﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻤﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٥‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٦‬‬
‫ﺃﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺑﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٥‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ‬
‫ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺜﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺑﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻘﻊ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ‬
‫ﺗﺪﺧﻞ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻭ ﺗﺒﺤﺚ ﻋﻨﻪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﺑﻖ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﻳﺔ( ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﺠﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺘﻚ ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻠﻘﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻥ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺟﻐﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﺃﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ (ac7 :‬ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻭﺑﺎﻟﻌﻜﺲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪/CTK-4000/CDP-200R/AT-5/AT-3/AP-620/AP-6‬‬
‫‪/PX-330/CTK-7000/CTK-6000/CTK-5000SK/CTK-5000‬‬
‫‪WK-7500/WK-6500/WK-500/WK-210/WK-200‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﺃﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ z00 :‬ﻭ ‪ (ckf‬ﻟﻠﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻲ‪ .‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻬﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪CASIO MUSIC SITE‬‬
‫)‪.(http://music.casio.com/‬‬
‫‪/PX-575R/PX-410R/CTK-900/CTK-691/CTK-671‬‬
‫‪/WK-3700/WK-3500/WK-3300/WK-3200/WK-3000‬‬
‫‪WK-8000/WK-3800‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪ ‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻣﺘﺒﻮﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﺃﻣﺘﺪﺍﺩ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ cpt :‬ﻭ ‪ (ept‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩﻫﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻠﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ Rhythm Converter‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ )ﻣﺸﺮﻭﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ‪ ‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ(‪ Rhythm Converter .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻛﺎﺳﻴﻮ ‪CASIO MUSIC SITE‬‬
‫)‪.(http://music.casio.com/‬‬
‫‪WK-1800/CTK-811/CTK-738/CTK-731‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﻻﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-141‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬
‫ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺇﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-142‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺳﻮﺍء ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(AR-142‬ﻻﺣﻆ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً ﺍﻥ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪ .‬ﻟﻤﺰﻳﺪﺍً‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-141‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﻭﺳﺎﺋﻂ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻹﺳﺘﻴﺮﺍﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ )ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ( ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﺨﺰﻥ‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﻴﺎً ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻘﺴﻢ ﻳﺸﺮﺡ ﻛﻞ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-141‬‬
‫• ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ”ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-131‬‬
‫ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻕ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-141‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻧﻘﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ MUSICDAT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺫﻭ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-135‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫‪AR-142‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺳﺎﺋﻂ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺫﻭ ﺳﻌﺔ ﻣﻦ ‪٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ‪ .١‬ﺇﻋﺘﻤﺎﺩﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻳﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪ MUSICDAT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻘﺪﻡ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ٢‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪ MUSICDAT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻛﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪ .MUSICDAT‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪ MUSICDAT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪،‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﻣﺠﻠﺪ ﺟﺪﻳﺪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﺬﺭ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺴﻤﻴﺘﻪ ‪ .MUSICDAT‬ﺑﻌﺪ‬
‫ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-135‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﻌﻞ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﻛﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻢ )ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ‬
‫ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪(.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ﺭﻗﻢ ‪ ١‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪ MUSICDAT‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫)ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ(‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻠﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-135‬‬
‫ﺃﻭ‪:‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-141‬‬
‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﻭﺛﺎﺋﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﻣﻊ ﻣﺪﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫‪Format‬‬
‫‪.١‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫‪Card Full‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Card R/W‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪No Card‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺤﻤﻞ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻤﺖ ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺘﻪ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺷﻘﺐ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪No Data‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﺃﻟﺦ‪ (.‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪No File‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪) MUSICDAT‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-135‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﺰﻑ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪.MUSICDAT‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﻠﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ ‪ MUSICDAT‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-132‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺣﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻪ ﺍﻭ ﻋﺰﻓﻪ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﺪ‬
‫‪ MUSICDAT‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪Not SMF0/1‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ SMF‬ﺫﻭ ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪.2‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ‪ SMF‬ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ‪،0‬‬
‫ﻭ ‪ 1‬ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪Protect‬‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺠﻌﻠﻪ ﻗﺎﻳﻞ ﻟﻠﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ‪.‬‬
‫‪Read Only‬‬
‫ﻣﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﻨﻔﺲ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ • ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻟﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍء ﻓﻘﻂ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺘﺎﺑﺔ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻠﻒ‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺣﺪ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻗﻀﻰ ﻟﻠﺤﺠﻢ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ ٣٢٠‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻻﻗﺼﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺒﻲ ﻟﺤﺠﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ )ﻟﻜﻞ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ( ﻋﻨﺪ‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺟﺪﺍً‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ٣٢ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ١٥٩ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ ٨ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ١٢٨‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ‬
‫ﻛﻠﻲ ﻣﻦ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ( ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪Size Over‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.١ .‬‬
‫‪.٢‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‪.‬‬
‫‪.٣‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ ‪.SDXC‬‬
‫‪.٤‬‬
‫ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻣﻊ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-132‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺮﻭﺕ ‪ SDXC‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪.SDHC‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺣﺬﻑ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺼﻨﻊ ﺣﺠﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-136‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻱ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ‪.‬‬
‫‪Wrong Data‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪Meas. Limit‬‬
‫ﺃﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.٩٩٩‬‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮﻙ ﻻﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔﻻﻳﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ‬
‫‪ -٩٩٩‬ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪AR-143‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ‬
‫‪Memory Full‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺒﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺿﺌﻴﻠﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺳﻌﺔ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻛﺎﻓﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺔ ﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻻﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫‪ .١‬ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﺢ ﺟﺰء‬
‫ﺁﺧﺮ ﻭ ‪ /‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻣﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ‪ ،‬ﺃﺧﺘﺮ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺈﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻩ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻇﻬﺮﺕ‬
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ“‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-54‬ﺃﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻻﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‬
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻔﺮﻍ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻭ‪/‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﺑﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻓﺎﺭﻍ ﻟﻠﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪File Name‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺴﻤﻴﺔ ﻣﻠﻒ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻌﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪Card Size‬‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻛﺎﻓﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺴﻌﺔ ﻗﺪﺭﻫﺎ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-144‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺹ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ‬
‫ﻻﺍﺳﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺃﻥ ﺃﺟﺪ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻻﺷﻴﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺠﺐ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﺑﺤﺮﺹ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻔﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺘﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺍﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪) AC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬
‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﻹﺟﺮﺍء ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﻟﺔ ”‪ “Please Wait‬ﻣﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪،‬‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻣﺸﻜﻠﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺯﻳﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻻﺗﺴﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺼﺤﻴﺢ ﻫﺬﻩ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻜﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﺟﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺬﻳﺮ!‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﺤﺬﻑ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻷﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭﻳﻦ )‪ R-2 ([B] E.PIANO‬ﻭ ‪R-5‬‬
‫)‪ ،([E] STRINGS‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-1 (POWER‬ﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺨﺮﺝ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺮﺗﻔﻊ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﺗﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻋﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪) AC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬
‫ﺗﻨﻘﻄﻊ ﻗﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺑﻀﻌﺔ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻨﻄﻠﻖ ﺧﺎﺻﻴﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-13‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ﺗﺒﻘﻰ ﻣﺨﺘﻔﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﻣﺾ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪) AC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬
‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺮﺋﻴﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺮ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﻴﻢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺗﺸﻴﺮﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﻻﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-13‬‬
‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺷﻲء ﻣﺎ ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ )‪ T-4 (PHONES‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-13‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺷﻲء ﺃﻭ ﻻﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺍﻗﻮﻡ ﺑﺎﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻻﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-18 (ACCOMP ON/OFF‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-26‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺃﺑﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ E:026‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،E:035‬ﻻﺷﻲء ﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻭﺗﺮ ﻣﺎ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-28‬‬
‫ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-128‬‬
‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺨﺰﻥ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ )‪ L-17 (START/STOP‬ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﻣﻦ ‪ F:001‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬
‫‪ F:100‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺍً )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-26‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-13‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻭ ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-128‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-13‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺎﻓﻆ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻮﻗﻒ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-13‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪) AC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬
‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺗﻘﻄﻊ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺰﻓﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻗﻄﻊ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﺻﻮﺗﻬﺎ ﺗﺰﻳﺪ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ‪) ٦٤‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ(‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-145‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺘﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-13‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-13‬‬
‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﺄﺧﺮﻯ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪) AC‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-9‬‬
‫ﻻﻳﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-126‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-13‬‬
‫ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﻭﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺸﻲء ﻋﻦ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻷﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻱ ﻓﻲ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﻊ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻻﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺑﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺍﻟﺒﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻪ ﻻﻳﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﻻﻳﻄﺎﺑﻖ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺃﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﺯﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ ،B‬ﻓﺎﻧﻪ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-18‬ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪.00‬‬
‫• ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ ‪ ،C‬ﻓﻬﺬﺍ ﻳﻌﻨﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-22‬‬
‫ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻱ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺳﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (AR-23‬ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ”‪.“Equal‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-13‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﻟﻠﻨﻮﺕ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻭﻛﺄﻧﻬﺎ ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻓﺠﺄﺓ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﻓﺤﺺ ﻭ ﺃﺿﺒﻂ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-33‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﻴﺪﻫﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-13‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻄﻬﺎ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ )ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻟﻠﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺘﻚ( ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺃﻥ ﺗﺘﺬﻛﺮ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺃﺧﺮ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻟﻬﺎ ﻭ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺩﻣﺔ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺤﻮﻟﻬﺎ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ”‪ “on‬ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-129‬‬
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫ﺃﻧﺎ ﻻﺍﺳﺘﻄﻴﻊ ﺗﺒﺎﺩﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-146‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺘﺼﻼ ﺑﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ‬
‫• ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺻﺤﻴﺤﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‬
‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-140‬‬
‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺃﺧﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ‬
‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻭﺛﻢ ﺃﻋﺪ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻓﺖ ﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻼﺕ‬
‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻲ ﻟﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫‪AT-3 / AT-5‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ ٦١ :AT-3‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ ٧٦ :AT-5‬ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪ ٦٤‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ )‪ ٣٢‬ﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ(‬
‫‪٨٠٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪) ١٠٠‬ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‬
‫ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫‪DSP‬‬
‫‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬
‫‪ DSP‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪١٠٠‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻗﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﻧﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻟﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪ ٩٩±‬ﺳﻨﺖ‬
‫‪١٧‬‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺑﺎﺕ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻣﻴﺰﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺻﻔﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٦‬‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٣٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٢٥٥‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٢٥٠‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪) ١٠٠‬ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻤﻂ(‬
‫ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺮﺍﺽ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫ﺳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ ﻭ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،١٠‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ١‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪٥‬‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ‬
‫‪ ٦) ٩٦‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ × ‪ ١٦‬ﺑﻨﻚ(‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻢ‬
‫‪ ٥‬ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ‪ ١٧ ،‬ﻣﺴﺎﺭ‬
‫‪ ٣٠٠٠٠‬ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً )ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻉ ﻛﻠﻲ ﻝ ‪ ٥‬ﺃﻏﺎﻧﻲ(‬
‫ﻛﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،SDHC‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﺒﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻋﺰﻑ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺐ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪ MIC IN‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪INST IN‬‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٥‬ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺻﻮﺗﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﺤﺪ ﺍﻷﻗﺼﻰ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ١٣ :‬ﺩﻗﻴﻘﺔ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻟﻠﻤﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ(‬
‫ً‬
‫)ﻣﺸﺘﻤﻼ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ(‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ٩٩٩‬ﻣﻠﻒ‬
‫‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﺰء )ﻣﻦ ‪ A01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ /A16‬ﻣﻦ ‪ B01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(B16‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﺋﻴﺴﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ ،DSP‬ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪MIC/INST‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻠﻤﺴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪ ١±‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ )ﻣﻦ –‪ ١٢‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٢+‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ(‬
‫‪ ٢± LOWER/UPPER 2/UPPER 1‬ﺟﻮﺍﺏ ﻣﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪Hz ٤٦٥٫٩- ٤٤٠٫٠ – ٤١٥٫٥ =A4‬‬
‫‪ ٣٠٥‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ١٠٠‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪٢٥٠‬‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪ ١٥٠‬ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫‪MIDI‬‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ ‪ ١٦‬ﺟﺮﺱ‪-‬ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‪ GM ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫‪AR-147‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻋﺠﻠﺔ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻢ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٢٤‬ﻧﺼﻒ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬
‫ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬
‫ﻛﺮﻭﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ‪ SD‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،SDHC‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٣٢‬ﺟﻴﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﻳﺖ‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺰﻑ ‪ ،SMF‬ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺇﺳﺘﺪﻋﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻼﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺮﺟﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﻌﻴﻴﻦ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺎﺑﺲ ‪L/MONO ،Line Out R‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻘﺒﺲ ‪Inst In‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬
‫‪TYPE B‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻋﻴﻢ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺴﺘﻨﻮﺗﻮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻋﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺪء‪/‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ(‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺃﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ × ‪٢‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ ٢٫٣ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﻓﻮﻟﺘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ‪ ١٫٥ :‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ )‪MAX (RMS‬‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺻﻐﻴﺮ ﺃﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ ٩ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ‪ ٢٠٠ :‬ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ٩ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪ ٢٠٠ :‬ﻣﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﻗﻴﺎﺳﻲ )ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺪﻳﻨﺎﻣﻴﻜﻲ ﻓﻘﻂ(‬
‫ﻣﻌﺎﻭﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ‪ ٣ :‬ﻛﻴﻠﻮ ﺃﻭﻡ‪ ،‬ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﻞ ‪ ١٠ :‬ﻣﻴﻠﻠﻲ ﻓﻮﻟﺖ‬
‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺇﻣﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻋﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻤﺮ ‪DC‬‬
‫ﻃﺮﻳﻘﻴﻦ‬
‫‪ ٦‬ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻧﻚ‪-‬ﻛﺮﺑﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﻢ ‪ D‬ﺃﻭ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻗﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪ ٤‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﻠﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫‪AD-A12150LW‬‬
‫ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ‪ ٦‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ٤ ،‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺑﻌﺪ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ .AC‬ﺃﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﻄﻞ ﻋﻤﻠﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﻬﻼﻙ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﺳﻢ × ‪ ٣ + ٢‬ﺳﻢ × ‪) ٢‬ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪ ٧,٠ :‬ﻭﺍﺕ ‪ ٧,٠ +‬ﻭﺍﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻮﺯﻥ‬
‫‪ ١٢‬ﻓﻮﻟﺖ = ‪ ١٨‬ﻭﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ ١٣٫٢ × ٣٧٫٨ × ٩٤٫٥ :AT-3‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ ١٤٫٩ × ٣٩٫٩ × ١١٨٫٧ :AT-5‬ﺳﻢ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ ٦٫٨ :AT-3‬ﻛﺠﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ(‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ‪ ٨٫٩ :AT-5‬ﻛﺠﻢ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً )ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ(‬
‫• ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺳﺎﻳﻖ ﺇﺷﻌﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-148‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺃءﺓ ﻭﻣﻼﺣﻈﺔ ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‬
‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﻀﻮء ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬
‫• ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ ﺟﺪﺍً‬
‫• ﻗﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ ‪ ،TV‬ﻣﺸﻐﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻟﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻛﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻻﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻥ‬
‫ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺗﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﻟﻠﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫• ﻻﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺍﻟﺒﻨﺰﻳﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻜﺤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﻳﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﻴﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﺘﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﻧﺎﻋﻤﺔ‬
‫ﻭﻣﺒﻠﻠﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﺿﻌﻴﻒ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭ ﻣﺤﻠﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺩﻝ ﻣﺨﻔﻒ‪ .‬ﺃﻋﺼﺮ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﺍﺋﺪﺓ ﻣﻦ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻗﻴﺎﻣﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺴﺢ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺘﻤﻠﺔ ﻭﺍﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪﺓ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻳﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﻣﻠﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪AC‬‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫•‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺳﻬﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﺰﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ‬
‫‪ AC‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﺠﺰ ﺃﻭ ﻗﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺣﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻱ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻓﻌﻞ ﺫﻟﻚ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻣﺼﻤﻢ ﻟﻺﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺰﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻐﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ‬
‫ﺣﻴﺚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﺭﺗﺸﺎﺵ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ .‬ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﻮﺿﻊ ﺃﻱ ﺇﻧﺎء‪ ،‬ﻣﺜﻞ‬
‫ﻣﺰﻫﺮﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺰﻫﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪.AC‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻔﺘﻮﺡ ﻭﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﻘﻢ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﺑﺘﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺑﺎﻟﺼﺤﻒ ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻔﺮﺵ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻭﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺘﺎﺋﺮ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ‬
‫ﺷﻲء ﺁﺧﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‪.‬‬
‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﺰﻉ ﻗﺎﺑﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﻣﻦ ﻣﺄﺧﺬ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻻﺗﺨﻄﻂ ﻓﻲ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬
‫ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻃﻮﻳﻠﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻦ‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﺤﺎﻭﻝ ﻣﻄﻠﻘﺎً ﻓﻲ ﺗﺼﻠﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪ AC‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺑﻴﺌﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻬﺎﻳﺊ ‪AC‬‬
‫ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ٤٠‬ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻣﺌﻮﻳﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻃﻮﺑﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٪١٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪RH ٪٩٠‬‬
‫ﻗﻄﺒﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪& :‬‬
‫■ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﺎﻡ‬
‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻫﻲ ”ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻠﺤﺎﻡ“ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺻﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻟﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻼﺳﺘﻴﻜﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺃﻧﻬﺎ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﺥ ﺃﻭ ﺧﺪﻭﺵ‪.‬‬
‫■ ﺁﺩﺍﺏ ﺍﻵﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ‬
‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺭﺍﻋﻲ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ ﺣﻮﻟﻚ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺈﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪ .‬ﺧﺬ ﺣﺬﺭﻙ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﺹ‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﺎﻅ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻻﺗﺰﻋﺞ ﺍﻵﺧﺮﻳﻦ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻣﺘﺄﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﻞ ﺑﺄﻥ ﺗﻐﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺍﻓﺬ ﻭﺃﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺳﻤﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-149‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
DSP ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮﺍﺕ‬
‫ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬DSP ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬
.(AR-34 ‫“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬DSP ‫ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬DSP ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬
.‫ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ‬DSP ‫ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ”ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ“ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺳﻢ‬،DSP ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ“ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ‬
‫ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺸﺘﻖ‬DSP ‫ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ‬.(AR-151 ‫“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬DSP ‫ ”ﻧﻮﻉ“ ﻣﻮﺿﺤﻴﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ”ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ‬٤٦ ‫ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ‬DSP ‫• ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
.‫ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻫﺬﻩ‬٤٦ ‫ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
42
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
RefPan 1
051
02
42
RefPan 2
052
12
Rotary 1
053
12
Rotary 2
12
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
Comp 1
001
02
Comp 2
002
04
Enhance1
003
054
04
Enhance2
004
Rotary 3
055
07
Phaser 1
005
12
Rotary 4
056
07
Phaser 2
006
12
Rotary 5
057
07
Phaser 3
007
01
Wah 1
058
09
Chorus 1
008
01
Wah 2
059
09
Chorus 2
009
01
Wah 3
060
09
Chorus 3
010
01
Wah 4
061
09
Chorus 4
011
22
CmpWah
062
09
Chorus 5
012
17
WahCho 1
063
24
CmpCho 1
013
17
WahCho 2
064
24
CmpCho 2
014
18
WahFln 1
065
41
RefCho
015
18
WahFln 2
066
08
Flanger1
016
16
WahDst 1
067
08
Flanger2
017
16
WahDst 2
068
08
Flanger3
018
20
WahTrm 1
069
08
Flanger4
019
20
WahTrm 2
070
25
CmpFln
020
21
WahPan 1
071
10
Delay 1
021
21
WahPan 2
072
10
Delay 2
022
19
WahRef 1
073
10
Delay 3
023
19
WahRef 2
074
10
Delay 4
024
15
WahCmp 1
075
10
Delay 5
025
15
WahCmp 2
076
11
Reflect1
026
03
Dist 1
077
11
Reflect2
027
03
Dist 2
078
11
Reflect3
028
03
Dist 3
079
26
CmpRef
029
30
DstCmp
080
36
ChoRef 1
030
23
CmpDst
081
36
ChoRef 2
031
34
DstTrm 1
082
36
ChoRef 3
032
34
DstTrm 2
083
38
FlnRef 1
033
35
DstPan 1
084
38
FlnRef 2
034
35
DstPan 2
085
38
FlnRef 3
035
31
DstCho 1
086
6
Tremolo
036
31
DstCho 2
087
27
CmpTrm
037
32
DstFln 1
088
46
TrmRef
038
32
DstFln 2
089
44
TrmCho 1
039
32
DstFln 3
090
44
TrmCho 2
040
29
DstWah 1
091
45
TrmFln 1
041
29
DstWah 2
092
45
TrmFln 2
042
29
DstWah 3
093
43
TrmDst 1
043
29
DstWah 4
094
43
TrmDst 2
044
33
DstRef
095
05
AutoPan
045
40
RefDst
096
28
CmpPan
046
14
Lo-Fi
097
37
ChoPan 1
047
13
RingMod1
098
37
ChoPan 2
048
13
RingMod2
099
39
FlnPan 1
049
13
RingMod3
100
39
FlnPan 2
050
AR-150
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
DSP ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫( ﺃﻭ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬AR-35 ‫ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬DSP ‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﻠﻴﻖ‬.‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬DSP ‫ ﻟﻠﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬DSP ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ‬
.‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ‬DSP ‫ ﻓﺄﻧﻚ ﺗﺤﺘﺎﺝ ﻹﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ‬،‫ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻧﻐﻤﺔ ﻣﺎ‬DSP ‫( ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ‬AR-44 ‫ﻣﺤﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬
،‫ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‬DSP ‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ ﻣﻦ‬.DSP ‫ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺔ ﻣﻦ‬٤٦ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ‬١٥ ‫ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻣﻦ‬،DSP ‫ ﻫﻲ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻨﻔﺮﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ‬١٤ ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ‬٠١ ‫• ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
.DSP ‫ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻫﻮ ﺇﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻦ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﻳﻦ ﻣﻦ‬
‫“ ﻳﺘﺼﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺨﻂ‬Wah-Compressor” ‫ﻳﺴﻤﻰ‬١٥ ‫ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬،‫ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﺒﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ‬.‫ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺒﻘﻮﺍ ﻓﻴﻪ‬،‫ ﻣﻔﺮﺩﻳﻦ ﻣﻜﻮﻧﻴﻦ‬DSP ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻳﺘﺘﻜﻮﻥ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺃﺳﻤﻴﻦ‬DSP ‫• ﺃﺳﻢ‬
.‫ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺘﺎﺑﻊ‬،“Compressor” ‫“ ﻭ‬Wah” ‫ﺏ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
DSP ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬
DSP ‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
CmpCho
Compressor-Chorus
24
Wah
Wah
01
CmpFln
Compressor-Flanger
25
Comp
Compressor
02
CmpRef
Compressor-Reflection
26
Dist
Distortion
03
CmpTrm
Compressor-Tremolo
27
Enhance
Enhancer
04
CmpPan
Compressor-AutoPan
28
AutoPan
AutoPan
05
DstWah
Distortion-Wah
29
Tremolo
Tremolo
06
DstCmp
Distortion-Compressor
30
Phaser
Phaser
07
DstCho
Distortion-Chorus
31
Flanger
Flanger
08
DstFln
Distortion-Flanger
32
Chorus
Chorus
09
DstRef
Distortion-Reflection
33
Delay
Delay
10
DstTrm
Distortion-Tremolo
34
Reflect
Reflection
11
DstPan
Distortion-AutoPan
35
Rotary
Rotary
12
13
ChoRef
Chorus-Reflection
36
RingMod
RingModulator
ChoPan
Chorus-AutoPan
37
Lo-Fi
Lo-Fi
14
FlnRef
Flanger-Reflection
38
WahCmp
Wah-Compressor
15
FlnPan
Flanger-AutoPan
39
WahDst
Wah-Distortion
16
RefDst
Reflection-Distortion
40
WahCho
Wah-Chorus
17
RefCho
Reflection-Chorus
41
WahFln
Wah-Flanger
18
RefPan
Reflection-AutoPan
42
WahRef
Wah-Reflection
19
TrmDst
Tremolo-Distortion
43
WahTrm
Wah-Tremolo
20
TrmCho
Tremolo-Chorus
44
WahPan
Wah-AutoPan
21
TrmFln
Tremolo-Flanger
45
CmpWah
Compressor-Wah
22
TrmRef
Tremolo-Reflection
46
CmpDst
Compressor-Distortion
23
.‫ ﺃﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‬،DSP ‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﻛﻞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
:‫ﺃﺫﻫﺐ ﻫﻨﺎ‬
AR-151
:DSP ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
(AR-152 ‫ ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬DSP ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬
(14 ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ‬01 ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ )ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
(AR-154 ‫ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬DSP ‫ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
(46 ‫ ﺇﻟﻰ‬15 ‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ )ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪DSP‬‬
‫■ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‬
‫‪Wah :01‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ”‪ “wah‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺆﺛﺮ ﺃﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎً ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ‪.LFO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺪﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪: ١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ‬
‫‪: ٢‬ﻳﺪﻭﻱ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺮﺷﺢ ‪wah‬‬
‫‪: ٣‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪LFO‬‬
‫‪: ٤‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪LFO‬‬
‫‪: ٥‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) LFO‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪LFO‬‬
‫‪Compressor :02‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺇﺧﻤﺎﺩ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻹﺧﺘﻼﻑ ﻭ ﺗﺠﻌﻞ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺤﻴﻞ ﺗﺪﻋﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﻤﺪﺓ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭ ﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺪﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪: ١‬ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺚ ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﺎﻏﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺨﻤﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻘﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻟﻺﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﺗﺆﺧﺮ‬
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﻏﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻥ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﺤﺪﺙ ﻟﻬﺎ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﻛﻤﺎ‬
‫ﻫﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﻘﻂ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺃﻗﻞ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ‬
‫ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺎﻏﻄﺔ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺸﻌﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﻫﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺏ‬
‫)ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﺪﺍﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ(‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻘﺪﺭ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﻜﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺿﻐﻂ ﻣﻄﺒﻖ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻷﻭﻗﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٣‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٤‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻞ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻋﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﺒﺪﺃ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪Distortion :03‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﺧﻠﺔ ﻭ ﻳﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﺘﺸﻮﻳﻬﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺪﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪: ١‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺤﻨﻰ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﺤﻨﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-152‬‬
‫‪Enhancer :04‬‬
‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭ ﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ –ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻭ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ –ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺤﺴﻦ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻈﺎﻫﺮﻫﺎ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺪﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪: ١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٢‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ –ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٣‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺴﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٤‬ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻛﻤﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﺭ ﻟﻤﺤﺴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ –ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻲ‪.‬‬
‫‪Auto Pan :05‬‬
‫ﻳﺠﺮﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ‪.LFO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺪﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪: ١‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٢‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٣‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) LFO‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪Tremolo :06‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺎً ‪.LFO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪: ١‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٢‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺰﺍﺯﺓ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٣‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪) LFO‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪Phaser :07‬‬
‫ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﺒﻀﺎﺕ ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻋﺮﻳﺾ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ LFO‬ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﻮﺭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‬
‫ﻭ ﺛﻢ ﺧﻠﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪: ١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٢‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪: ٣‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪: ٤‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪Flanger :08‬‬
‫‪Reflection :11‬‬
‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻱ ﻭﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻰ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ ‪ LFO‬ﻗﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻺﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪: ١‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪: ٢‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪: ٣‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪) LFO‬ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻌﺸﻮﺍﺋﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪: ٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺆﺛﺮ ﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻹﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻜﺮﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍء‪ .‬ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﺳﻤﻌﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺻﻮﺍﺕ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﻗﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﻣﺪﻳﺔ‪:‬‬
‫‪: ١‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ )‪(٨ ،٧ ،٦ ،٥ ،٤ ،٣ ،٢ ،١‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺛﻤﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺃﻧﻤﺎﻁ ﻟﻺﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻌﻜﺴﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Chorus :09‬‬
‫ﻳﻌﻄﻰ ﻋﻤﻖ ﻟﻸﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﻭﺃﺗﺴﺎﻉ‪ .‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻺﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪: ١‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪: ٢‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪: ٣‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﺔ )ﺍﻟﺠﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺜﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪: ٤‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪: ٥‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ )ﺇﺣﺎﺩﻱ‪ ،‬ﺃﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‪ ،‬ﺛﻼﺛﻲ(‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪.‬‬
‫‪Delay :10‬‬
‫ﻳﺆﺧﺮ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﻳﻐﺬﻳﻬﺎ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺨﻠﻖ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﻭ ﻳﻌﻄﻲ ﺃﺻﻮﺍﺕ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ‬
‫ﺇﺗﺴﺎﻉ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪: ١‬ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٢‬ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٣‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٤‬ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﻘﻨﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﻫﻲ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪(٥ ،٤ ،٣ ،٢ ،١ ،٠) Wet Level: ٥‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٦‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ )‪(٢ ،١‬‬
‫ﻳﺨﺘﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ١‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٢‬ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ‪.L/R‬‬
‫‪Rotary :12‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻫﻮ ﻣﺤﺎﻛﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﺓ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪: ١‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )‪(٣ ،٢ ،١ ،٠‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٢‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺧﺮﺝ ﻣﻀﺎﻋﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٣‬ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ )ﺑﻄﺊ‪ ،‬ﺳﺮﻳﻊ(‬
‫ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﻭﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٤‬ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻣﻠﺔ )ﻳﺪﻭﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﻗﻒ(‬
‫ﻳﻮﻗﻒ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٥‬ﺳﻘﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺭﻉ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺭﻉ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪: ٦‬ﺃﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺭﻉ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ً‬
‫ﻣﺤﻮﻻ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺎﺭﻉ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ‬
‫‪: ٧‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻲء )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٨‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻥ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬
‫‪Ring Modulator :13‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺮﺏ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺬﺑﺬﺏ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺨﻠﻖ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭ ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪: ١‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪) OSC‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻌﻲ ﻹﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺬﺑﺬﺏ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٢‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪: ٣‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪) LFO‬ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ‪.LFO‬‬
‫‪: ٤‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ )‪(٣ ،٢ ،١‬‬
‫‪: ١‬ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٢‬ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻭ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٣‬ﻳﺨﺮﺝ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻖ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) ٢‬ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻀﻤﻴﻦ ﻟﻠﺤﻠﻘﺔ ﻭ‬
‫ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ ﻭ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻨﺘﺞ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺧﻴﺮ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-153‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫‪Lo-Fi :14‬‬
‫■ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‬
‫ﻳﻄﺒﻖ ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪Lo-Fi‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺭﺗﺠﺎﻋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﺘﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﻤﻮﺝ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺭﺍﻧﻲ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻂ‬
‫ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪ ١‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﺮﺍﺩﻳﻮ ‪ FM‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻤﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‬
‫‪ ٢‬ﻭﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺷﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﻭﺥ ﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻭﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻢ‪:‬‬
‫‪: ١‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٢‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ )ﻣﻦ ‪ ٠‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪(١٢٧‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻓﻴﻒ‪.‬‬
‫‪: ٣‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪(٥ ،٤ ،٣ ،٢ ،١ ،٠) ١‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪.١‬‬
‫‪: ٤‬ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪(٥ ،٤ ،٣ ،٢ ،١ ،٠) ٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﻣﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪: ٥‬ﻛﺜﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪(٥ ،٤ ،٣ ،٢ ،١ ،٠) ٢‬‬
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺩﺩ ﻟﻤﻮﻟﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ‪.٢‬‬
‫‪: ٦‬ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺻﻐﻴﺮﺓ )‪(٣ ،٢ ،١ ،٠‬‬
‫ﻳﺸﻮﻫﻪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪ .‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ ﺍﻷﻛﺒﺮ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺈﺗﺤﺎﺩ ﻧﻮﻋﻴﻴﻦ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﻴﻦ ﻣﻦ ‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﻟﻜﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ‪ DSP‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ :‬ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ‪Distortion-Wah :٢٩‬‬
‫‪ .١‬ﺃﺳﻢ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ DSP‬ﻳﻤﺘﻠﻚ ﺟﺰﺋﻴﻦ‪ :‬ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ‪.‬‬
‫‪ “Distortion” 3 Distortion-Wah‬ﻭ ”‪“Wah‬‬
‫‪ .٢‬ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﻣﺎﻫﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﺤﺚ ﺧﻼﻝ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ‬
‫‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ“ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺎﻡ!‬
‫ﺇﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻴﺔ ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ‬
‫ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﻮﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ‪.‬‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬
‫‪Wah‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪LFO‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪LFO‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ‪LFO‬‬
‫‪Distortion‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫‪Chorus‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪LFO‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪LFO‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ‪LFO‬‬
‫‪Flanger‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪LFO‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪LFO‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ‪LFO‬‬
‫‪Reflection‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻐﺬﻳﺔ ﺍﻹﺳﺘﺮﺟﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪Compressor‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻞ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫‪Auto Pan‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪LFO‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪LFO‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ‪LFO‬‬
‫‪Tremolo‬‬
‫ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪LFO‬‬
‫ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪LFO‬‬
‫ﻋﻤﻖ ‪LFO‬‬
‫‪ .٣‬ﺃﻭﺟﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ”ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ‪ DSP‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺮﺩ“‬
‫ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ‪ AR-152‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ ،AR-154‬ﻭﻻﺣﻆ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﻭ ﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ‬
‫ﻟﻠﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻔﺴﻬﺎ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ”ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ“ ﻣﻦ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺎ ”‪ ،“Distortion-Wah‬ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﺴﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺳﻢ ﻫﻮ‬
‫”‪ “Distortion‬ﻭﻟﺬﻟﻚ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ”ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ“ ﻭ‬
‫”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ“ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺒﻬﻢ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻳﺠﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﻭﺃﻣﺪﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺏ‬
‫”ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ“ ﻭ ”ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ“ ﺑﺎﻟﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻰ ”‪ “Distortion :03‬ﺑﺼﻔﺤﺔ ‪.AR-152‬‬
‫‪ .٤‬ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ ٢‬ﻭ ‪ ٣‬ﺃﻋﻼﻩ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻷﻳﻤﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺳﻢ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ‬
‫‪ DSP‬ﻟﻠﻨﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺩﻭﺝ‪.‬‬
‫• ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﺒﺪﺍ ﻣﻦ ‪ ،١‬ﻭ ﻳﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻢ‬
‫ﺑﻤﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻟﻜﻞ ﻋﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪ .‬ﺃﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻨﺎ‬
‫”‪ “Distortion-Wah‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪.‬‬
‫‪ :١‬ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ‬
‫‪ :٢‬ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ‬
‫‪ :٣‬ﺷﻜﻞ ﻣﻮﺟﺔ ‪LFO‬‬
‫‪ :٤‬ﻣﻌﺪﻝ ‪LFO‬‬
‫‪ :٥‬ﻋﻤﻖ ‪LFO‬‬
‫‪AR-154‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺃﻭﺗﺎﺭ ‪ Fingered 3‬ﻭ ‪Full Range‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ‬
‫ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪ Fingered 1‬ﻭ‬
‫‪ ،Fingered 2‬ﻓﺎﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺗﺄﺧﺬ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﻋﺘﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻳﻀﺎً‪.‬‬
‫ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ‪Fingered 2 ،Fingered 1‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Cm‬‬
‫‪Fm‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‪Dm‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪A add9‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫‬
‫‪Cm‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Gm7‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Fm7‬‬
‫‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪F7‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪A7‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Ddim‬‬
‫‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪b‬‬
‫‪Bm‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‬
‫‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪#‬‬
‫‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Gm Am‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Cdim‬‬
‫‪Caug *3‬‬
‫‪Csus4 *3‬‬
‫‪Csus2 *3‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ‪ ،Fingered 3‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺗﻔﺴﺮ ﻛﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺃﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﻷﺷﻜﺎﻝ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﻻﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪ ،Full Range‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻧﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬
‫ﻣﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻮﺗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﺎﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻛﻮﺗﺮ ﺟﺰﺋﻲ‪.‬‬
‫• ﻟﻴﺲ ﻣﺜﻞ ‪ ،3 ،2 ،Fingered 1‬ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ‪ Full Range‬ﻳﺘﻄﻠﺐ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺧﺮ‬
‫ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﻣﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ ﻟﻜﻲ ﺗﺸﻜﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬
‫ﺣﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻋﻤﺔ‬
‫‪C7‬‬
‫‪Cm7 *3‬‬
‫‪CM7‬‬
‫‪Cm7b5 *3‬‬
‫‪C7b5 *3‬‬
‫‪C7sus4‬‬
‫‪Cadd9‬‬
‫‪Cmadd9‬‬
‫‪CmM7‬‬
‫‪Cdim7 *3‬‬
‫‪C69 *3‬‬
‫‪C6 *1 *3‬‬
‫‪Cm6 *2 *3‬‬
‫*‪ ١‬ﻣﻊ ‪ ،Fingered 2‬ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﻛﺎ ‪.Am7‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫*‪ ٢‬ﻣﻊ ‪ ،Fingered 2‬ﻳﻔﺴﺮ ﻛﺎ ‪.Am7 5‬‬
‫*‪ ٣‬ﻣﻌﻜﻮﺳﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻐﻴﺮ ﻣﺪﻋﻤﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻻﺕ‪.‬‬
‫‪AR-155‬‬
‫‪AR-156‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ‬
‫‪B‬‬
‫‪(A#)/Bb‬‬
‫‪A‬‬
‫‪(G#)/Ab‬‬
‫‪G‬‬
‫• ﺣﻴﺚ ﺃﻥ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻮﺗﺮ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺩﻳﻞ ﻗﺪ ﻻﻳﺪﻋﻢ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻷﻭﺗﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺃﻋﻼﻩ‪.‬‬
‫)‪F#/(Gb‬‬
‫‪F‬‬
‫‪E‬‬
‫‪(D#)/Eb‬‬
‫‪D‬‬
‫)‪C#/(Db‬‬
‫‪C‬‬
‫‪Root‬‬
‫‪Chord‬‬
‫‪Type‬‬
‫‪M‬‬
‫‪m‬‬
‫‪dim‬‬
‫‪aug‬‬
‫‪sus4‬‬
‫‪sus2‬‬
‫‪7‬‬
‫‪m7‬‬
‫‪M7‬‬
‫‪m7b5‬‬
‫‪7b5‬‬
‫‪7sus4‬‬
‫‪add9‬‬
‫‪madd9‬‬
‫‪mM7‬‬
‫‪dim7‬‬
‫‪69‬‬
‫‪6‬‬
‫‪m6‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء‬MIDI ‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
.‫ ﻭ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺰء‬MIDI OUT ‫ ﻭ‬MIDI IN ‫ﺍﻵﺗﻲ ﻳﻮﺿﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻗﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ ﻗﻨﻮﺍﺕ‬
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 01
SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 02
SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 03
SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 04
SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 05
SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 06
SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 07
SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 08
SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 09
SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 10
SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 11
SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 12
SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 13
SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 14
SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 15
SEQUENCER TRACK/MIDI 16
MIDI ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
OUT
IN
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
:‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
B01
B02
B03
B04
B05
B06
B07
B08
B09
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
‫ﺃﺳﻢ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
Upper1
Upper2
Lower
Harmonize
System Upper1
System Upper2
System Lower
Metronome
Percussion
Drum
Bass
Chord1
Chord2
Chord3
Chord4
Chord5
MIDI ‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
OUT
IN
01*
02
03
04
05
06
07
-09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
-----------------
:‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
A01
A02
A03
A04
A05
A06
A07
A08
A09
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
.(AR-128 ‫ )ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬KeyboardCh” ‫ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ‬.‫ ﺗﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬A01 ‫ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء‬MIDI OUT ‫* ﻗﻨﺎﺓ‬
.(AR-38 ‫ ﺍﻧﻈﺮ ”ﻛﻴﻒ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻢ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ‬،‫• ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬
AR-157
‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺟﻊ‬
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ‬
‫ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻭﻝ ﺃﺩﻧﺎﻩ‪:‬‬
‫ﻟﻔﺤﺺ ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ‪:‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺩﺍﺋﻤﺎً ﺗﺤﻔﻆ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﻮﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-61‬‬
‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “on‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ ”‪) AutoResume‬ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(AR-129‬ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻌﺎﺩ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬
‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺧﺮ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺣﻮﻟﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪.‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ ﻛﺎ ”‪) Default‬ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻹﺟﺒﺎﺭﻳﺔ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-129‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻠﻴﺔ ”ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(AR-40‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪) “Parameter‬ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﻓﻘﻂ( ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ”‪) Initialize‬ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﻟﻠﻮﺿﻊ‬
‫ﺍﻷﺑﺘﺪﺍﺋﻲ(“ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-129‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫ﺑﻨﻮﺩ ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ ،‬ﻧﻐﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪ DSP ،‬ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‪،‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻘﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻧﻮﻉ ‪DSP‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺑﻨﺪ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ‬
‫ﺇﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻠﻤﺲ‬
‫ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻹﻧﺤﻨﺎء*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺎﺳﻚ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺟﺰء ﺗﻮﻗﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺎﺕ‬
‫ﻣﺮﺷﺢ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ(‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺻﻮﺕ ﻣﺎﻗﺒﻞ‪-‬ﺍﻟﻌﺪ ﻟﻸﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫ﻋﺰﻑ ﺗﻜﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪*O‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻷﻏﻨﻴﺔ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺗﻲ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻗﻨﺎﺓ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻲ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺧﺮﺝ ‪ MIDI‬ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺭﺿﺔ ‪LCD‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺪﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪/‬ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻧﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺰﻱء‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻘﺔ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪*O‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫ﺿﺮﺑﺔ ﺑﻨﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ‪DSP/‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪ DSP‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻟﻠﻌﻤﻞ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ )ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻨﻮﻉ(‬
‫‪AR-158‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪*O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫‪*O‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺎﺣﺒﺔ‬
‫‪*O‬‬
‫ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ )ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ(‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺃﻏﻨﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺭﺕ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻴﺴﺮﻯ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺟﺰء ﺍﻟﻴﺪ‪ -‬ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻨﻰ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺑﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻃﺒﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪ A01‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪A04‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء*‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء*‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺸﻦ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء*‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻨﻐﻴﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﻋﻢ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء*‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫ﺿﻮﺍﺑﻂ ﺍﻟﺨﻼﻁ ﻟﻠﺮﺋﻴﺴﻲ‪ DSP ،‬ﻭ ‪،MIC/INST‬‬
‫ﻭﻟﻸﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪ A05‬ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪ ،A16‬ﻭﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻦ ‪B01‬‬
‫ﻭﺣﺘﻰ ‪B16‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫*‪٣‬‬
‫*‪٤‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺰﻑ ﺑﺎﻷﺻﺎﺑﻊ ﻟﻸﻭﺗﺎﺭ‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺇﺻﺪﺍء ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺇﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻜﻮﺭﺱ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء*‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﺍﺏ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ*‬
‫‪٤‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﻗﺎﺑﻠﻴﺔ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﺠﺰء*‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪٣‬‬
‫ﺟﺬﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪١‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫*‪٢‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻉ‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺒﻖ ﻟﻠﺴﻠﻢ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺳﻴﻘﻲ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻟﺒﻨﻮﺩ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫ﺭﻗﻢ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬
‫‪٢‬‬
‫*‪١‬‬
‫ﻣﺪﻯ ﺇﻧﺤﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺠﺰء‬
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪/‬ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ‪*DSP‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺍﻹﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬
‫‪*O‬‬
‫ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫‪O‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ A01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪،UPPER 1) A04‬‬
‫‪ ،LOWER ،UPPER 2‬ﺍﻟﺘﻨﺎﻏﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ(‪.‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “on‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻝ ”‪) “RegFltAcmp‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-127‬‬
‫ﺗﺮﺗﺐ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺟﺰء ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻣﻦ ‪ A01‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪،UPPER 1) A03‬‬
‫‪.(LOWER ،UPPER 2‬‬
‫ﻻﺗﺴﺘﺪﻋﻰ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ”‪ “on‬ﻣﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ ﻝ ”‪) “RegFltScal‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(AR-127‬‬
Models: AT-3 / AT-5
1 - 16
1 - 16
Transmitted
1 - 16
1 - 16
Recognized
MIDI Implementation Chart
Default
Changed
Function
Basic
Channel
0 - 127
0 - 127 *1
Mode 3
X
0 - 127
O 9nH v = 1 - 127
X 9nH v = 0, 8nH V =**
Mode 3
X
O 9nH v = 1 - 127
X 9nH v = 0
X
O
Default
Messages
Altered
X
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O *2
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
Filter cutoff
Bank select
Modulation
Data entry LSB, MSB
Volume
Pan
Expression
DSP Parameter0
DSP Parameter1
DSP Parameter2
DSP Parameter3
Hold 1
Sostenuto
Soft pedal
Release time
Attack time
Version : 1.0
‫ ﻻﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻋﻼﻗﺔ‬:**
Remarks
O
*2
O
Mode
Note ON
Note OFF
True voice
Velocity
Key’s
Ch’s
Note
Number
After
Touch
Pitch Bender
Control
Change
0
1
6, 38
7
10
11
16
17
18
19
64
66
67
72
73
*3
*3
*3
74
O 0 - 127
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O *2
O *2
O 0 - 127
O *2
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O *2
O *2
O *2
X
X
X
74
76
77
78
80
81
82
83
91
93
98, 99
100, 101
X
X
X
X
X
:True #
: Song Pos
: Song Sel
: Tune
O
O
Program
Change
System
Common
: Clock
: Commands
O
O
X
O
O
X
Aux
System Exclusive
System
Real Time
X
O
X
O
X
X
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
Filter cutoff
Vibrato rate
Vibrato depth
Vibrato delay
DSP Parameter4
DSP Parameter5
DSP Parameter6
DSP Parameter7
Reverb send
Chorus send
NRPN LSB, MSB
RPN LSB, MSB
O : Yes
X : No
.‫ ﻳﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻨﻐﻤﺔ‬:*1
‫ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬MIDI ‫ ﺃﻧﻈﺮ ﺃﺩﻭﺍﺕ‬،‫ ﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﺮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﻨﻈﺎﻡ‬،RPN ،NRPN ‫ ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﻮﻝ‬:*2
.http://world.casio.com/
.‫ ﺗﺒﻌﺄ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺪﺍﻝ‬:*3
: All sound off
: Reset all controller
: Local ON/OFF
: All notes OFF
: Active Sense
: Reset
Messages
Remarks
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
‫‪A‬‬
‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ‬
‫ﻣﻦ ﻓﻀﻠﻚ ﺣﺎﻓﻆ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻛﻤﺮﺟﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻘﺒﻞ‪.‬‬
‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﻳﺔ ﺗﺸﻴﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﻧﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﻴﺔ ﻓﻰ ﺃﻟﻤﺎﻧﻴﺎ‪.‬‬
‫‪MA1011-B Printed in China‬‬
‫‪AT3/AT5-AR-1B‬‬
‫ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ‬
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺇﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻔﺼﻞ ”ﺇﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ‬
‫ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻥ“‪.‬‬
‫‪K‬‬
‫‪AT3/AT5-AR-1B‬‬
Download PDF

advertising